s Contents, Foreword SIMADYN D Hardware Manual General technical data 1 Subracks 2 CPU module 3 Coupling memory module 4 Input/output modules 5 Communications support modules 6 Technology subrack 7 Program memory / Interface modules 8 Plug-in cables 9 Operator control panel OP2 10 Edition 04.2011 Index Safety guidelines ! DANGER ! WARNING ! CAUTION CAUTION NOTICE Correct usage This Manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the Manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage. used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesireable result or state. Note the following: This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Marken SIMATIC and SIMADYN D are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. Copyright SIEMENS AG 2006 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG A&D AS CC DC Frauenauracher Strae 80 91056 Erlangen Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Siemens AG 2006 Technical data subject to change. A5E01114837-02 Editions SIMADYN D Manual Hardware Edition 04.2011 NOTE Overview (chapter editions) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Please note that the current edition of this documentation contains different editions of the individual chapters. The following overview tells you when a chapter was revised the last time. Chapter Edition Foreword Edition 12.2004 1 General technical data Edition 08.2005 2 Subracks Edition 04.2011 3 CPU module Edition 03.2001 4 Coupling memory module Edition 03.2001 5 Input/output modules Edition 12.2004 6 Communications support modules Edition 12.2004 7 Technology subrack Edition 03.2001 8 Program memory modules / Interface modules Edition 04.2011 9 Plug-in cables Edition 06.2002 10 Operator control panel OP2 Edition 03.2001 iii Editions iv Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 12.2003 Foreword Purpose of this Manual This Manual explains the principle use and functions of the STEP 7 automation software with the main focus on the appropriate technological and drive control components T400, FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D, SIMATIC TDC or D7-SYS. TDC: Technology and Drives Control Basic knowledge required This Manual addresses programmers and commissioning engineers. General knowhow regarding automation technology is required in order to understand the contents of the Manual Validity of the Manual This Manual is valid for SIMATIC D7-SYS Version 6.2. Additional support If you have questions relating to the use of the products described in the Manual, which cannot be answered here, then please contact your local Siemens office. You can also call the Hotline: Training Center * Tel.: +49 (180) 5050-222 * Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 * e-mail: adsupport@siemens.com Appropriate training courses are available in order to make it easier to get to know the SIMADYN D automation system. Please contact the central Training Center in D-Erlangen (I&S IS INA TC): * Tel.: +49 (9131) 7-27689, -27972 * Fax: +49 (9131) 7-28172 * Internet: www.siemens.de/sibrain * Intranet: http://info-tc.erlm.siemens.de/ NOTE Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 This user part of the Manual does not include any detailed information/instructions with individual descriptions, but is only intended to provide a basic procedure. More detailed information on the dialog boxes in the software and how they are handled is provided in the appropriate online help. v Foreword Information overview This manual is part of the overall documentation for the technological and drive control components T400, FM 458, SIMADYN D, SIMATIC TDC and SIMATIC D7-SYS: Title System and communications configuring D7-SYS Content The first project in a few steps This Section provides an extremely simple entry into the methodology when assembling and programming the SIMATIC TDC/SIMADYN D control system. It is especially conceived for first-time users of a control system. System software This Section provides basic know-how about the structure of the operating system and an application program of a CPU. It should be used to obtain an overview of the programming methodology, and basis for configuring user programs. Communications configuring This section provides you with basic know-how about the communication possibilities and how you configure links to the communication partners. Changeover from STRUC V4.x to D7-SYS Essential features are included in this section, which have changed over STRUC V4.x with the introduction of SIMATIC D7-SYS. STEP 7 option packages Basis software for D7-SYS This section explains the essential use and the functions of the STEP 7 automation software. For first users, it provides an overview on configuring, programming and commissioning a station. When working with the basis software, you can access the online help which provides you with support when it comes to detailed questions on using the software. CFC The CFC language (Continuous Function Chart) allows you to graphically interconnect blocks. When working with the particular software, you can also use the online help which can answer detailed questions regarding the use of the editors/compiler. SFC Configuring sequence controls using SFC (Sequential Function Chart) of SIMATIC S7. In the SFC editor, you generate a sequence chart using graphic resources. The SFC elements of the chart are then positioned according to specific rules. Hardware The complete hardware spectrum is described as reference in this Manuals. Function blocks These Reference Manuals provide you with an overview of selected function blocks for the associated technological and drive control components T400, FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D and SIMATIC TDC. vi Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Foreword Guide As first time user, we recommend that this Manual is used as follows: * Please read the first section on using the software in order to get to know some of the terminology and basic procedure. * Then use the particular sections of the Manual if you wish to carry-out certain processing steps (e.g. loading programs). If you have already executed a small project, and have gained some experience, then you can read individual sections of the Manual in order to get up to speed about a specific subject. A&D Technical Support Can be accessed globally at any time of the day: World-wide (Nurnberg) Technical Support Local time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365 days Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com GMT: +1:00 Europe / Africa (Nurnberg) Authorization United States (Johnson City) Technical Support and Authorization Asia / Australia (Peking) Technical Support and Authorization Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com GMT: +1:00 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 Phone: +1 (423) 262 2522 Fax: +1 (423) 262 2289 E-Mail: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com GMT: -5:00 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75 Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74 E-Mail: adsupport.asia@siemens.com GMT: +8:00 Technical Support and Authorization speak generally German and English. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 vii Foreword viii Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Contens Foreword ......................................................................................................................................... v 1 General technical data ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.4.1 1.1.4.2 1.1.4.3 1.1.4.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.1.10 1.1.11 1.1.12 1.1.13 1.1.14 1.1.15 1.1.16 1.1.17 1.1.18 1.1.19 Installation and EMC guidelines ............................................................................ 1-2 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 1-2 Qualified personnel................................................................................................ 1-2 Danger and warning information ........................................................................... 1-3 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 1-4 Use and operation ................................................................................................. 1-4 Machinery Directive ............................................................................................... 1-5 SIMADYN D outputs .............................................................................................. 1-5 Professionally-trained and knowledgeable personnel ........................................... 1-6 CE Mark ................................................................................................................. 1-6 Connecting external voltages ................................................................................ 1-6 Mounting ................................................................................................................ 1-6 Cables.................................................................................................................... 1-6 Potential bonding ................................................................................................... 1-6 Principle when connecting components ................................................................ 1-7 Potential bonding rail ............................................................................................. 1-7 Actual example of a multi-motor drive ................................................................... 1-8 Protective grounding.............................................................................................. 1-9 Radios.................................................................................................................... 1-9 Cabinet................................................................................................................... 1-9 Mounting clearances............................................................................................ 1-10 Power loss in the cabinet..................................................................................... 1-11 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 1-12 Subracks .............................................................................................................. 1-13 Cables.................................................................................................................. 1-14 Mounting SIMADYN D unit in drive converters.................................................... 1-14 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 ESD guidelines .................................................................................................... 1-15 What is ESD?....................................................................................................... 1-15 Handling ESD modules........................................................................................ 1-15 Measuring and making changes on ESD modules ............................................. 1-16 Transporting modules .......................................................................................... 1-17 1.3 Ambient conditions .............................................................................................. 1-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 05.2006 vii Contens 2 Subracks ................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 Subracks SR6, SR6V............................................................................................. 2-2 Power supply ......................................................................................................... 2-2 Voltage monitoring functions ................................................................................. 2-3 Battery back-up...................................................................................................... 2-4 Backplane bus ....................................................................................................... 2-5 Ventilation/cooling.................................................................................................. 2-6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................... 2-7 Technical data........................................................................................................ 2-8 Dimension drawings............................................................................................. 2-10 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 Subracks SR12 and SR24................................................................................... 2-13 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 2-13 Voltage monitoring functions ............................................................................... 2-15 Battery back-up.................................................................................................... 2-16 Backplane buses.................................................................................................. 2-17 Ventilation/cooling................................................................................................ 2-19 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 2-19 Technical data...................................................................................................... 2-21 Dimension drawings............................................................................................. 2-23 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 Subrack SRT400.................................................................................................. 2-26 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 2-26 Voltage monitoring functions ............................................................................... 2-27 Battery back-up.................................................................................................... 2-28 Backplane bus ..................................................................................................... 2-28 Ventilation/cooling................................................................................................ 2-28 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 2-28 Technical data...................................................................................................... 2-29 3 CPU module ............................................................................................................................ 3-1 viii 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 CPU module PM5 .................................................................................................. 3-2 Supplementary components .................................................................................. 3-7 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 3-7 Connector assignments ......................................................................................... 3-7 Technical data........................................................................................................ 3-8 Connector assignments ......................................................................................... 3-9 Connection diagram............................................................................................. 3-10 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 CPU module PM6 ................................................................................................ 3-11 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 3-15 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 3-15 Technical data...................................................................................................... 3-15 Connection diagram............................................................................................. 3-16 3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x.............................................................. 3-17 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Contens 4 Coupling memory module ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4..................................................... 4-2 Real-time clock in the MM3 coupling memory module.......................................... 4-3 Technical data MM11, MM3, MM4 ........................................................................ 4-7 5 Input/output modules............................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 Input/output modules EA12 ................................................................................... 5-2 Supplementary components .................................................................................. 5-2 Connector assignment X5 ..................................................................................... 5-4 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 5-4 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 5-5 Connecting diagram............................................................................................... 5-6 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 Input/output module EB11 ..................................................................................... 5-7 Supplementary components .................................................................................. 5-8 Connector- and terminal assignment..................................................................... 5-9 Terminal assignment for SC55 .............................................................................. 5-9 Terminal assignment for SC13 ............................................................................ 5-11 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-13 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-14 Connecting diagram............................................................................................. 5-15 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 Expansion module IT41 ....................................................................................... 5-16 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 5-19 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-20 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-22 Connector assignment X7 for SC49 .................................................................... 5-23 Connector assignment X7 for SC54 .................................................................... 5-25 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 5-27 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-27 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-28 Connecting diagrams........................................................................................... 5-31 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.4.1 5.4.4.2 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 Expansion module IT42 ....................................................................................... 5-33 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 5-34 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-35 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-35 Connector assignment X8 ................................................................................... 5-37 Connector assignment X8 for SC49 .................................................................... 5-37 Connector assignment X8 for SC54 .................................................................... 5-39 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 5-41 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-41 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-42 Connecting diagram............................................................................................. 5-44 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 Converter control ITDC........................................................................................ 5-45 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 5-48 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 5-49 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 ix Contens 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-50 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-50 Technical data...................................................................................................... 5-53 Mounting/Installation ............................................................................................ 5-54 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-55 Connecting diagrams ........................................................................................... 5-55 6 Communications support modules ...................................................................................... 6-1 x 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.1.3 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.2.3 Communications support modules CS .................................................................. 6-2 Communications support module CS7 .................................................................. 6-2 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 6-4 Technical data........................................................................................................ 6-6 Connecting diagram............................................................................................... 6-7 Communications support module CS8 .................................................................. 6-8 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 6-9 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-11 Connection diagram............................................................................................. 6-11 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 SINEC H1 module CSH11 ................................................................................... 6-12 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-13 Connector assignment of the interfaces .............................................................. 6-13 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22.................................................. 6-15 Slave connection.................................................................................................. 6-16 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-19 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-19 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-20 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL .................................................................................... 6-21 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-21 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 6-21 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-21 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-22 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 Interface module SS1 .......................................................................................... 6-23 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-26 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-26 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 Interface module SS2 .......................................................................................... 6-27 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-27 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-28 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 Interface module SS31 ........................................................................................ 6-29 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-29 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-30 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 Communications module SS4 ............................................................................. 6-31 Connecting programmers or PC .......................................................................... 6-31 USS connection for OP2, VD1............................................................................. 6-33 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Contens 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.8.5 6.8.6 6.8.7 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-36 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 6-36 SS4 diagnostic functions ..................................................................................... 6-37 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 6-39 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 6-40 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.9.3 6.9.4 6.9.5 Communication modules SS5, SS52 .................................................................. 6-41 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-42 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 6-43 Diagnostics LED .................................................................................................. 6-43 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 6-44 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 6-46 7 Technology subrack .............................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1 Technology subrack SRT400 ................................................................................ 7-2 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.3.1 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.5.1 7.2.5.2 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 Technology module T400 ...................................................................................... 7-2 General features .................................................................................................... 7-2 Mechanical design, terminals ................................................................................ 7-4 Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation ................................ 7-4 Pulse encoder 2..................................................................................................... 7-5 Absolute value encoders ....................................................................................... 7-7 Serial interfaces ..................................................................................................... 7-7 Bus termination ...................................................................................................... 7-8 Communications switch ......................................................................................... 7-8 Synchronizing possibilities..................................................................................... 7-9 Parameters .......................................................................................................... 7-10 Terminal assignment ........................................................................................... 7-10 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 7-12 8 Program memory modules / Interface modules.................................................................. 8-1 8.1 8.1.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 ..................................................... 8-2 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Interface module SE13.1 ....................................................................................... 8-4 Application information .......................................................................................... 8-5 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-5 Connector assignment X1 ..................................................................................... 8-6 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 Interface module SE26.1 ....................................................................................... 8-7 Application information .......................................................................................... 8-8 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-9 Connector assignment........................................................................................... 8-9 Diagram ............................................................................................................... 8-10 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 Interface module SB10 ........................................................................................ 8-11 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-12 Application information ........................................................................................ 8-13 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 xi Contens 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-14 Connector assignment ......................................................................................... 8-15 Block diagram ...................................................................................................... 8-16 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 Interface module SB60 ........................................................................................ 8-17 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-18 Application information......................................................................................... 8-18 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-19 Connector assignment ......................................................................................... 8-20 Block diagram ...................................................................................................... 8-21 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 Interface module SB61 ........................................................................................ 8-22 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-23 Application information......................................................................................... 8-24 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-26 Connector assignment ......................................................................................... 8-27 Block diagram ...................................................................................................... 8-28 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 8.7.5 Interface module SB70 ........................................................................................ 8-29 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-30 Application information......................................................................................... 8-31 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-32 Connector assignment ......................................................................................... 8-33 Block diagram ...................................................................................................... 8-34 8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.5 Interface module SB71 ........................................................................................ 8-35 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-36 Application information......................................................................................... 8-37 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-38 Connector assignment ......................................................................................... 8-39 Block diagram ...................................................................................................... 8-40 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 8.9.5 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 ..................................................... 8-41 Function description............................................................................................. 8-42 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 8-43 Application information......................................................................................... 8-44 Pin/terminal assignment X1/X2............................................................................ 8-44 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-46 9 Plug-in cables ......................................................................................................................... 9-1 xii 9.1 General information ............................................................................................... 9-2 9.2 Cable types ............................................................................................................ 9-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Contens 10 Operator control panel OP2 ................................................................................................ 10-1 10.1 Function overview................................................................................................ 10-2 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 Process data handling ......................................................................................... 10-3 General information ............................................................................................. 10-3 Behavior at run-up ............................................................................................... 10-3 Operator control overview for process data handling.......................................... 10-4 10.3 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 Binary value processing....................................................................................... 10-5 Message system processing ............................................................................... 10-6 Message on the display ....................................................................................... 10-7 Message print-out ................................................................................................ 10-8 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 10.4.5 10.4.6 10.4.7 10.4.8 System operation ............................................................................................... 10-10 Function overview.............................................................................................. 10-10 Parameterizing the message system processing.............................................. 10-11 Parameterizing for process data........................................................................ 10-12 Parameterizing for the USS interface ................................................................ 10-13 Parameterization for the printer ......................................................................... 10-14 End of system operation .................................................................................... 10-15 Parameterizing the display options.................................................................... 10-15 Self-test.............................................................................................................. 10-15 10.5 10.5.1 System run-up.................................................................................................... 10-18 Establishing a communications link to SIMADYN D.......................................... 10-18 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 Handling OP2 errors .......................................................................................... 10-20 System messages ............................................................................................. 10-20 Operating messages.......................................................................................... 10-21 10.7 Front panel......................................................................................................... 10-24 10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting ....................................................... 10-25 10.9 Battery change................................................................................................... 10-26 10.10 Connecting elements ......................................................................................... 10-26 10.11 Power supply ..................................................................................................... 10-27 10.12 Baud rates.......................................................................................................... 10-27 10.13 Cables and connectors ...................................................................................... 10-27 10.14 10.14.1 10.14.2 Using a printer with OP2.................................................................................... 10-29 Configuring the printer ....................................................................................... 10-29 Printer connection.............................................................................................. 10-29 10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips ......................................................... 10-30 Index .............................................................................................................................................. I-1 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 xiii Contens xiv Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 1 General technical data Overview Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines 1.2 ESD guidelines 1-15 1.3 Ambient conditions 1-18 1-2 1-1 General technical data 1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines NOTE The information in this Manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, please contact your local Siemens office. Further, the contents of this Manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty. 1.1.1 Definitions 1.1.1.1 Qualified personnel For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, a Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following qualifications, for example: 1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures. 2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety procedures. 3. Trained in rendering first aid 1-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data 1.1.1.2 Danger and warning information ! DANGER For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Danger" indicates death, severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. ! WARNING For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Warning" indicates death, severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. ! CAUTION For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Caution" indicates that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTE For the purpose of this Manual, Note" indicates information about the product or the respective part of the Instruction Manual which is essential to highlight. ! CAUTION This board contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. Prior to touching any electronics board, your body must be electrically discharged. This can be simply done by touching a conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e.g. bare metal cabinet components, socket protective conductor contact). ! WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. 1 Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in severe personal injury or property damage. It is especially important that the warning information in all of the relevant Operating Instructions/Instruction Manuals are strictly observed. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1-3 General technical data 1.1.2 Introduction What is EMC ? Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device to function, fault-free in a specified electromagnetic environment without influencing the environment in an inadmissible fashion. This design- and EMC guideline supplements the documentation on the individual components. The SIMADYN D control system consists of individual components (e. g. subracks, modules, interface modules, operator control panels, position transmitters). The components can be installed in the widest range of system configurations according to individual requirements. When the components are arranged in a distributed fashion (decentral topology) a noisy environment cannot be neglected. Thus, specific requirements are placed on the design and EMC of the system. EMC represents a quality feature for * Intrinsic noise immunity: Immunity against internal electrical noise and disturbances * External noise immunity: Immunity against external electromagnetic noise * Noise emission level: Influencing the environment due to electromagnetic radiation Operational reliability and noise immunity In order to achieve the highest possible operational reliability and safety and noise immunity for a complete system (closed-loop control and drive motor) the control manufacturer and user (including end customers) must take certain measures. Perfect functioning of SIMADYN D can only be guaranteed and the legal requirements fulfilled (89/336/EC) if all of these measures are observed. 1.1.3 Use and operation SIMADYN D components are designed for use in industrial environments in accordance with EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2. They may not be operated or connected to the public lowvoltage network. 1-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data 1.1.4 Machinery Directive In accordance with the Machinery Directive 89/392/EC, it should be ensured that if SIMADYN D fails or executes an incorrect function, that this does not result in the machine/system going into a potentially hazardous condition. This must always be taken into account when configuring the machine/system. The system may not be commissioned until it has been proven that the final product is in conformance with the Directive. Low-Voltage Directive The Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EC is only applicable for products with supply voltages of 50 V AC and/or > 75V DC. For SIMADYN D, this involves the following components: * SP 7 6DD 1683-0BB0 * SP 8.5 6DD 1683-0BC0 * SP 9.5 6DD 1683-0BE5 * SP 22.5 6DD 1683-0CC5 * SP 23.5 6DD 1683-0CD5 * SB 60 6DD 1681-0AF4 * SB 70 6DD 1681-0AG2 * SRT 400 6DD 1662-0CG0 These components correspond to the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive. ! 1.1.4.1 ! WARNING Open equipment SIMADYN D is regarded as open equipment. This means that you must always install SIMADYN D in a cubicle, cabinet or electrical control room that can only be accessed using a key or tool. Only trained or authorized personnel are allowed access to such cubicles, cabinets or electrical operating rooms. SIMADYN D outputs DANGER Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 When the equipment is powered-up or powered -on, the outputs have undefined statuses while the power supply voltages are running-up. This fact must be taken into account when designing the system. 1-5 1 General technical data 1.1.4.2 Professionally-trained and knowledgeable personnel Only professionally-trained, knowledgeable personnel may configure, install, commission and operate SIMADYN D. 1.1.4.3 CE Mark SIMADYN D components have no CE Mark for the following reasons: * they cannot be practically used autonomously * they are not generally available * they can only be used by specially-trained personnel NOTE 1.1.4.4 If a CE Mark is required, this is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the machine/complete system. Connecting external voltages If external voltages (e. g. pulse encoders) are connected to SIMADYN D inputs, which are supplied from an external power supply, then this external supply must also be shutdown when the SIMADYN D power supply is shutdown or fails. 1.1.5 Mounting SIMADYN D components must be mounted in a metal cabinet, enclosed on all sides. 1.1.6 Cables All signal cables which are connected to SIMADYN D must be screened. 1.1.7 Potential bonding In order to ensure disturbance-free operation, the components which are connected and communicate with one another may not be at different potentials. This means that all components must be connected with one another through potential bonding cables. 1-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data 1.1.8 Principle when connecting components All of the components (subracks, power supplies etc.), which are connected using signal cables, must also be connected with potential bonding cables (exception: Components with fiber-optic cable connections). Subrack A Subrack B 1 Subrack C Potential bonding conductor EBG 1.1.9 Potential bonding rail A potential bonding- or grounding rail must be provided in each cabinet to allow simple wiring. All of the internal and external components must be connected to this potential bonding- and grounding rail. Basic circuit SIMADYN D Schaltschrank Switching cubicle A <2m SIMADYN D B LEISTUNGSKOMPONENTEN fest mit Schrankholm verbunden POWER COMPONENTS connected fixed with cubicle beam Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1-7 1-8 Externe Verbindungen External connections SV S IMA DY N D Schaltschrank 1 Switching cubicle 1 <2m 6 mm2 Externe Verbindungen External connections Interface Modul Interface modul SV S IMA DY N D Schaltschrank 2 Switching cubicle 2 P24 External power supply Externe SV M 16 mm2 Potentialausgleichsleitung Voltage equalazing cable SV P24 M SV S IMA DY N D Ground bus Schirmschiene (Zackenschiene) Erd-/Potentialausgleichsschiene Earth circuit-connector Schaltschrank n Switching cubicle n General technical data 1.1.10 Actual example of a multi-motor drive Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data 1.1.11 Protective grounding The protective ground is connected via the protective conductor (PE) at the cabinets and components. For SIMADYN D, the potential bonding conductor/cable does not have a protective conductor function. For SIMADYN D it is required for reliable operation and noise suppression. The protective conductor must be routed in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0160. For subracks, the protective conductor cross-section must be 6 mm2 and for cabinets, 10 mm2. 1.1.12 Radios It is not permissible to use radios > 2W close to SIMADYN D. For low-rating radios, a distance of > 1m must be maintained between the radio and SIMADYN D. 1.1.13 Cabinet * All SIMADYN D components must be mounted in a metal cabinet * Each cabinet must have a ground/potential bonding rail, which is connected to the cabinet frame at both ends. * All SIMADYN D subracks must be connected to the 2 grounding/potential bonding rail through a 6 mm cable which should be as short as possible. The connection via the PE connection of the power supply is not sufficient. * Non-damped contactors may not be used in a cabinet with SIMADYN D components. * If non-damped contactors are used in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D, then the cabinets must be separated by a metal partition. * All of the cabinets associated with multi-motor SIMADYN D drives must be connected through a potential bonding conductor with at least 2 a 16 mm cross-section (the customers PE connection is not sufficient). * Each cabinet in which SIMADYN D components are installed/mounted must have a screen rail. Serrated rails are suitable. The screen rail must be connected directly to the cabinet frame. * No gas discharge lamps may be used in the cabinet. * The screens of incoming cables must be connected directly to the screen rail. * The cabinets must be designed so that air can circulate freely within them. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1-9 1 General technical data 1.1.14 Mounting clearances The following minimum clearances must be maintained if SIMADYN D subracks are mounted one on top of the other: (For 2200 x 600 x 600 mm cabinets) Front view Side view EG > 50 mm > 50 mm min.120 mm > 50 mm > 50 mm Air intake Discharged air min.120 mm EG Discharged air Air deflection plate min. 75 mm ZG Air intake Access level 1-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data 1.1.15 Power loss in the cabinet Different maximum temperature values are obtained for the SIMADYN D components, depending on the installation type 1 * open rack * cabinet with air mesh * closed cabinet with forced convection * closed cabinet with heat exchanger 1) 2) 3) 4) >30mm Frame / wall Cabinet (closed) with self-convection and forced air circulation Cabinet (open) with forced ventilation, air slots > 600 cm 2 Closed cabinet with heat exchanger The power loss dissipated from a cabinet depends on the cabinet design, its ambient temperature and the arrangement of the various devices in the cabinet. 1 Ambient temperature 55C 50 4 40 30 2 3 20 200 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 400 600 1000 800 Power loss 1200 1400W 1-11 General technical data Nominal values for permissible ambient temperatures of a cabinet with the dimensions 600 mm x 600 mm x2200 mm as a function of the installed power loss can be taken from the figure above. 1. Open unit / wall 2. Cabinet with air slots 3. Closed cabinet with self-convection and forced air circulation using an equipment fan 4. Closed cabinet with heat exchanger If a cabinet is ventilated from below via the cable duct, more favorable conditions are obtained as illustrated under 2). For mounting types 1) and 2), it is assumed, that there is a minimum of 1m clearance between the cabinet and the ceiling. 1.1.16 Power supply Measures against noise voltages The following instructions to suppress noise in systems/plants must be observed so that noise voltage spikes on the supply cable in the cabinet are eliminated. Suppressing supply cables When the equipment is supplied from a 115/230 V supply, a line filter must be installed in the cable as close as possible to where the cable enters the cabinet (e. g. 250 V AC/ 10 A). The ground connection of the line filter must be connected to the central grounding point in the cabinet through the shortest possible path. Discharge capacitors for DC supplies If a cabinet is connected to a central 24 V supply, noise voltages can be coupled-into the cabinet via the supply cable. We recommend that noise suppression capacitors are installed where the 24 V supply cable enters the cabinet. These capacitors can be mounted on the cabinet ground or the screen rail. If several 24 V power supplies are used in networked systems, then the grounds of the power supplies must be connected with on another via the grounding / potential bonding rail and connected to the subrack. In order to diminish the effects of noise and disturbances, a line filter should be provided for the 24V DC power supply of the digital inputs and outputs ( e.g. line filter SIFI-B, Order No. B84112-B-.... from Epcos / line filter NF 1-1 from Phonix Contact ). This should be located as close as possible to the terminal block. The shield connection of the line filter must be connected to ground through the shortest possible distance. ! 1-12 WARNING Protective separation in accordance with VDE 0160 must be guaranteed for all power supply units which are used to supply SIMADYN D units and modules. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data Power supply potentials For SIMADYN D, the grounds of all secondary voltages must be connected together and connected to the subrack housing and grounded; this enhances the discharge of noise signals and voltages. Housing 230/115 V AC 24 V DC PE +5V + 15 V - 15 V Ground Using clocked power supplies If a clocked power supply is used for the 24V supply, the rated output of the clocked power supply units must be designed for the inrush current of SIMADYN D (the factor is 200 % of the rated current). Otherwise, the clocked power supply can ramp-up along the short-circuit current limiting and undefined conditions can occur. 1.1.17 Subracks * The subracks must be connected to the grounding/potential bonding rail using the shortest possible 6mm2 cable. * All of the boards must be screwed into subracks. This is also required during the commissioning phase! * Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers. * If modules are inserted in an adapter during the commissioning phase, the front panel must be electrically connected to the housing through the shortest possible path. * Modules may neither be removed nor inserted under voltage. * The connectors for serial interfaces must be screwed to the front panel. * The maximum temperature of the air drawn-in by the subrack is 55C. The subrack must be mounted so that air can freely circulate. It must be ensured that heat cannot build-up (no hotspots). * The air drawn-in by the subrack must be as dust-free as possible. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1-13 1 General technical data 1.1.18 Cables Cables from the outside (e. g. to the terminal modules) may not be routed in a common cable duct with internal cables in the cabinet. For incoming screened cables (analog and binary), the screen must be connected to the screen rail where the cable enters the cabinet. The cable must then be routed, still screened up to the terminal module/module. Screens are not connected to terminal modules/modules. Serial connecting cables must be screened. The screen must be connected to a metallized connector housing. Further, it must also be connected to the screen rail. The cable screen may not be connected to pin 1 of the connector. Screening using just the front panels of the modules is not effective The screen cables must be connected at both ends to the screen rails in the cabinets. All analog signal cables must be screened, both in the cabinet as well as outside the cabinet. Single-ended grounding of cable screens For analog signal cables, which only conduct low signal levels (mV or A), the cable screen is connected to the cable rail at one side in the cabinet. Screening, permissible cable lengths All of the signal cables must be provided with screen. Module Cable length, screened Outputs 1000 m Inputs, 230 V AC 1000 m Inputs, 24...60 V DC 1000 m Below 500 V AC, a minimum clearance of > 10 cm must be maintained between signal cables and power cables; for power cables above 1 kV AC, a clearance > 30 cm must be maintained. 1.1.19 Mounting SIMADYN D unit in drive converters When mounting SIMADYN D modules in drive converters, the following should be observed: * The tachometer cables of the pulse encoders should have double screens for lengths >10m. * Only terminal modules and cables in the SIMADYN D program may be used. * All cable screens must be connected through the largest possible surface area to the screen rail. The screen rail must be grounded using the shortest possible 10mm2 cable. 1-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data * Avoid installing the drive converters close to radio transmitter antennas * The drive converters must always be mounted in enclosed metal cabinets. 1.2 ESD guidelines 1.2.1 What is ESD? 1 Almost all of the SIMADYN D modules have highly-integrated devices. These devices are, from their very nature, extremely sensitive to overvoltage conditions, and therefore also to electrostatic discharge. The abbreviation stands for electrostatic discharge ESD ATTENTION ACHTUNG Observe Precautions for Handling Nur geschultes Personal darf die Verpackung offnen Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) Elektrostatisch gefahrdete Bauelemente (EGB) ORIGINAL PACKING Modules, which use these devices have the following warning label on the component side: Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltage- and energy level which lie far below the perception levels of human beings. Voltages such as these occur when personnel touch a component or a module without having first being previously electrostatically discharged. Components, which have been subject to such overvoltage conditions, can generally not be immediately identified as being faulty, as this is only manifested after a somewhat longer operating time. 1.2.2 Handling ESD modules * As a general rule, electronic modules should only be touched if this is absolutely necessary. * Components may only be touched if the person - is continuously grounded through an ESD bracelet, or - is wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1-15 General technical data * Before touching an electronics module, you must electrically discharge your body. This can be simply done by touching a conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e. g. bare metal cabinet parts, water pipe etc.) * Modules may not come into contact with highly insulating materials which can be statically charged. This includes plastic foils, insulating desktops, clothing manufactured out of man-made fibers. * Modules may only be placed down on conductive surfaces (desktop with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam rubber, ESD packing bags, ESD transport containers, cardboard- or paper surfaces). * Modules may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television sets. 1.2.3 Measuring and making changes on ESD modules * It only permissible to make measurements at the modules, if - the measuring unit is grounded (e. g. via protective conductor) or - before making measurements with an electrically-isolated measuring device, the probe is briefly discharged (for example by touching a bare metal control housing). When carrying-out soldering work on modules, ESD soldering irons must be used or at least the soldering iron tip grounded. 1-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 General technical data 1.2.4 Transporting modules Modules and components may only be stored and transported in conductive packing materials (e. g. metallized plastic boxes, metal containers). 1 If the packaging is not conductive, then the modules must first be wrapped in conductive packaging materials. This can include, for example conductive foam rubber or normal household aluminum foil. The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown in the following diagram. a = conductive flooring surface d = ESD coat/jacket b = ESD desk = ESD chain c = ESD shoes f = grounding connection for the cabinets Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 1-17 General technical data 1.3 Ambient conditions The following safety regulations must VDE 0160 be applied: Electric power equipment with electronic devices Data for Protective separation" of 115/230 V AC power supply parts with respect to PELV circuits Data for Protective separation" of 25V AC/ 60V DC signal voltages with respect to PELV circuits VDE 0106 Part 1 Data regarding shock protection Protective class according to VDE 0106 Part I (with protective conductor) for 115/230V supply voltage II (safety extra-low voltage) for 24V supply (protective separation") Air intake temperature for self- or forced cooling 0 degrees C up to + 55 degrees C It should be observed whether the module is designed for natural air cooling or forced ventilation Storage temperature -25 degrees C up to +70 degrees C Mechanical specifications: Testing in accordance with SN 29050 in operation 1-18 Severity grade, class 12 during transport Severity grade, class 22 certification Manufacturers certification for EMC (in accordance with the EC Directive) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 08.2005 2 Subracks Overview Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V 2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24 2-13 2.3 Subrack SRT400 2-26 2-2 2-1 2 Subracks 2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V Description The subracks accommodate SIMADYN D modules with the format (HD) 233.4 220 mm. An integrated power supply provides the necessary voltages for the modules via the backplane bus (L bus) and permits data transfer between them. No. of slots SR6/SR6V: 6 The slots are identified by a labeling strip. 2.1.1 Power supply The power supply (type SP7, 6DD1683-0BB0) plugs into the SIMADYN D ES 902 C subrack system in the righthand subrack slot. It is secured using a screw locking so that it cannot slide out and guarantees natural air cooling (SR6) or unrestricted forced ventilation with mounted fan (SR6V) of the subrack. Power The current demand of the modules may not exceed the available output currents of the 5 V and +/-15 V supplies (refer to the Chapter Technical data"). Otherwise, a larger subrack must be used, e. g. SR12.x. Front panel elements green LED green: red LED: Error-free operation Fault condition reset button to restart modules connection for the supply voltage (screw/plug-in terminal X1) connection for an external back-up battery (screw/plug-in terminal X2) test sockets to check the 3 output voltages 5 V, +/-15 V (short-circuit protection is provided via protective resistors) Supply connection 2-2 The 230 V supply voltage is fed-in via the 4-pole screw/plug-in terminal X1. The connection assignment is printed on the front panel: Connector X1, Pin Significance 1 L phase conductor 2 N neutral conductor 3 Not connected 4 PE protective conductor Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks NOTES It must be a slightly accessible circuit breaker in the supply circuit. The connector X1 is not permissible as a circuit breaker. The connector X1 is permissible only for the internal wiring and may be plugged only in the voltageless state or be split. The connector X1 must not be used for a power cable removable of the terminal user. 2 The protective conductor must be connected at connector X1, pin 4. It is not sufficient to connect a protective conductor. The following fuses are located on the power supply PC board Fuses NOTE F 1: T800 mA H 250 V (supply) F 2: T800 mA H 250 V (supply) F: T50 mA H Caution: bipolar fuse An external fuse must be dimensioned according to the following operating data: Input current (at 230 V): In = 600 mA Fuse link: It = 0.5 As Peak inrush current: Is = 25 A NOTE 2.1.2 The power supply PC board is suitable for the connection to IT systems. Voltage monitoring functions Input voltage The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage conditions. Input voltage (Vrated = 1-ph. 230 V AC) Response Undervoltage: Green OK LED goes dark < 170 ...175 V The output voltages are shutdown; CPU stop (DSAVE signal) The system automatically restarts when the input voltage increases to approx. 190 V. Overvoltage Red fault LED is lit; > approx. 265 V The output voltages are shutdown, CPU stop (DSAVE signal) No automatic restart (the line supply voltage must be disconnected) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-3 Subracks Output voltage All of the output voltages are monitored for an undervoltage condition (e. g. as a result of overload/short-circuit). Undervoltages at the output Response V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V Red fault LED is lit (for t>100-200 s) The output voltages are shutdown (CPU stop) No automatic restart (the line supply voltage must be disconnected) V (+ 15 V) < approx. 14 V V (- 15 V) > approx. -14 V Red fault LED is lit 5V voltage remains System failure message System failure message The associated module (STOP" tab) is configured in HWConfig under Object properties" to define how the module behaves when a system failure message is output (bus signal *RDYIN=low): Modules can reset their binary and analog outputs CPU modules can go into the STOP" condition (H") 2.1.3 Battery back-up The SR6 subrack does not have its own back-up battery. Battery connection A back-up battery can be connected at the screw/plug-in terminal X2 to save configured values (application software) during a power failure (using function block SAV). The connection assignment is printed on the front panel: Connector X2, Pin Designation External battery Comment 1 0V Battery ground 2 BATAL Battery monitoring (alarm" for logical 0) 3 Vcc + 3.0 ...4.5 V battery voltage Current load: Approx. 10 A depending on the particular CPU module It is recommended that the battery is changed every year. When using a Lithium battery, a series resistor of 39 must be provided to prevent an inadmissibly high charging current when a fault condition develops (5V of the power supply is applied to the battery via a defective diode - which could be a potential explosion hazard). The monitoring CPU module in SR6(V) does not initially identify when there is no back-up battery or the back-up battery is discharged (no flashing b"). 2-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks Battery voltage monitoring ! WARNING The SE60 interface module (6DD1681-0GA0, information will be provided on request) includes the battery and supplies a monitoring signal, which is connected at X2, pin2 BATAL". This TTL signal outputs a 0" when the battery voltage falls below 3.0 V. For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration. 2 ! DANGER When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material. There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries. Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and European legislation and regulations. The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder before the subrack or power supply is disposed of. 2.1.4 Backplane bus All of the inserted modules receive their voltages and exchange data via a parallel backplane bus (L bus). Daisy chain jumpers The bus uses the daisy chain principle where a CPU module accepts the token signal and then transfers it to the next CPU module. Thus, a daisy chain jumper must be inserted in all backplane bus PC board slots where there is no CPU module (or EPx signal processor module). If another module is inserted, the jumper is unimportant. The jumpers must be correctly inserted up to the last (righthand) CPU module. A jumper is required if a module is not located at that connector slot! The two pins to insert the jumpers are located to the right of the backplane bus connector (96-pin socket connector). All of the jumpers are inserted when the equipment is shipped. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-5 Subracks Signal assignment, backplane connector 2.1.5 X201 to X206 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C Pin No. Row a Row b Row c 1 5V 5V 5V 2 AUX2 AB20 AB22 3 AUX1 AB21 AB23 74 +15V +15V +15V 5 AUX0 -15V -15V 6 *LOCK *CSPER *CSINI 7 5VEXT 5VEXT *RSERQ 8 Vcc AB12 AB0 9 *BATAL 0V AB1 10 *DSAD AB13 AB2 11 *DSAVE PLC0 AB3 12 AB19 AB14 AB4 13 *OUTDS PLC1 AB5 14 *RESET AB15 AB6 15 *BHE PLC2 AB7 16 *BRQ AB16 AB8 17 *BGIN PLC3 AB9 18 *BGOUT AB17 AB10 19 *BCLR PLC4 AB11 20 *IR0 AB18 DB0 21 *IR1 0V DB1 22 *IR2 DB11 DB2 23 *IR3 0V DB3 24 *RDYIN DB12 DB4 25 *RDY PRIVAT DB5 26 *WR DB13 DB6 27 *RD 0V DB7 28 CLK DB14 DB8 29 *CLK.M 0V DB9 30 *DEN DB15 DB10 31 *HWE RES SBR 32 DT/*R 0V SBT Ventilation/cooling The subrack SR6 is designed for natural air cooling. The SR6V has a fan on the top panel to operate CPU modules which require forced ventilation. The fan has a connecting terminal for its 1-ph. 230 V AC supply voltage. The fan is not monitored. 2-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks Discharged air The subrack must be able to discharge hot air: The discharged air may not be restricted by mounted components When mounting equipment or other components, a minimum clearance of 60 mm must be maintained above and below the subrack If the subrack is mounted in a cabinet, the cabinet must have air ventilation slots. If the cabinet is enclosed, the subrack must be force-ventilated (an SR6V must be used). If two subracks are mounted one on top of the other, there must be a minimum 120 mm clearance between the two subracks, whereby the upper subrack must be separated from the lower subrack by an air deflection plate. 2.1.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity EMC The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting studs through a min. 6 mm cable which should be kept as short as possible. Potential bonding using the PE pin of line connector X1 is not sufficient! All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor having a minimum cross-section of 16 mm. Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers (SR81, SR82, SR83). All modules must be tightly screwed into the subrack. No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with SIMADYN D. If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D, the cabinets must have a metal partition between them. The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential. Before removing the power supply, the connecting cables must be disconnected. The connecting cables must first be disconnected from the supply so that they are in a no-voltage condition! The screens of screened cables must be directly connected to the grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still screened. NOTE Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Additional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to the Section General technical data"! 2-7 2 Subracks 2.1.7 Technical data Input voltages AC power supply according to DIN IEC 38 Input voltage Vin 230 V (+ 10% / - 15%) Input frequency 47.5 ... 62.5 Hz Non-periodic overvoltages according to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2 Voltage 460 V Duration 1.3 ms Recovery time, min 0.1 s Events per hour max. 10 Brief voltage dips according to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3 Output voltages Voltage 0 Duration 5 ms Recovery time, min 0.1 s Events per hour max. 10 Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V Output current 1.5 to 7 A Ripple < 50 mVpp Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V) Base load 1.5 A when a CPU module is inserted Overvoltage protection with suppressor diode to protect the modules Stabilization time < 80 ms after Vin= 230 V; <1 ms after load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated 2-8 Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V Output current 0 to 0.7 A Ripple < 150 mVpp Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module which requires this voltage Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks General data Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V Output current 0 to 0.6 A Ripple < 150 mVpp Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module which requires this voltage Time to establish the output voltages Approx. 200 ms after the power supply voltage has been applied SR6 dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 225 x 320 x 280 Dimensions of the SP7 power supply in mm (W x H x D) 45.72 x 233.4 x 220 Weight 4 kg Radio interference suppression level Limit value class B according to VDE 0871 Ventilation SR6: Natural air cooling SR6V: Fan on the top panel Screw/plug-in terminal X1 Phonix, type MSTB 2.5/4-ST/5,08, cable cross-section 2.5mm Screw/plug-in terminal X2 Phonix, type MSTB 2.5/3-ST/5,08, cable cross-section 2.5mm 2 2-9 Subracks 2.1.8 Dimension drawings S01 S02 S06 OK FAULT RESET 0V +5V +/- 15V SIEMENS SIMADYN D 1 0V 2 BATAL 3 VCC X2 L-Bus 1L 2N 3 4 PE 9,99 cm X2 Explanation: Subrack SR6 (front view) Cable retention 2-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks + + 2 + L bus + + + Subrack SR6 (side view) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-11 Subracks 2-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks 2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24 Order No. Subracks SR12.x and SR24.x are available for different supply voltages and with or without fan. Order No. Supply voltage Fan Power supply SR12.1 6DD1682-0CC0 24 V DC yes SP22 SR12.2 6DD1682-0CD0 24 V DC no SP23 SR12.3 6DD1682-0BC3 115/230 V AC yes SP22.5 SR12.4 6DD1682-0BC4 115/230 V AC no SP23.5 SR24.1 6DD1682-0BC0 24 V DC yes SP8 SR24.2 6DD1682-0BE0 24 V DC no SP9 SR24.3 6DD1682-0CE3 115/230 V AC yes SP8.5 SR24.4 6DD1682-0CE4 115/230 V AC no SP9.5 type 2 Description The subracks accommodate SIMADYN D modules with the format (HT) 233.4 220 mm. An integrated power supply provides the necessary voltages for the modules via 2 backplane buses (L bus, C bus) and permits data transfer between them. Number of slots SR12.x: 12 SR24.x: 24 The slots are identified by a labeling strip. 2.2.1 Power supply The power supply plugs into the SIMADYN D rack. Line filter The power supply has a line filter which limits the radio interference voltage to limit value class A in accordance with VDE 0871. Front panel elements Green LED: Error-free operation Red LED: Fault condition Compartment for the back-up battery Supply voltage connection (screw/plug-in terminal X1) Connection for an external back-up battery via screw/plug-in terminal X3 (this is optional to a back-up battery which can be inserted in the subrack itself) Reset (cold restart of the modules) by Depressing the reset button Jumpering pins 1 and 2 at connector X4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-13 Subracks Test sockets to check the 3 output voltages 5 V, +/-15 V (short-circuit proof) Supply connection The line supply voltage is connected through the 3-pole screw/plug-in terminal X1. The connection assignment is printed on the front panel: Above the voltage selector switch (Slide switch) can be switched to between an input nominal voltage from 230 V and 115 V. The in each case valid value becomes visible with transfer of the switch. SR12.1 and SR12.2 SR12.3 and SR12.4 SR24.1 and SR24.2 SR24.3 and SR24.4 Input voltage 24 V DC 230 V AC (default setting of voltage selector switch ) 115 V AC (change over voltage selector switch ) X1 Pin 1 +24 V Phase conductor L X1 Pin 2 Ground (0 V) Neutral conductor N X1 Pin 3 Protective ground conductor PE Protective conductor PE External fuse For SR12.x: In = 16 A max.. (rating) It= 6 As Is = 32 A (inrush peak) For SR24.x: In = 32 A max.. It= 10 As Is = 64 A For SR12.x: (AC230V) In = 1.2 A max.. It= 0.6 As Is = 6 A (inrush peak) For SR24.x: (AC230V) In = 2.7 A max.. It= 1 As Is = 9 A (inrush peak) (inrush peak) X2 pins 1 - 4 Monitoring the power supply and fan assembly (relay) X3 pins 1 - 2 Feed for an external back-up battery X4 pins 1 - 2 Reset: A reset is initiated by jumpering the contents (optional to using the reset button) The specified current In is the current that can occur at a maximum insertion of the subrack. The power supplies are in part oversized, and have a higher maximum input current (Chapter: Technical dates). NOTES The protective conductor must be connected at connector X1, pin 3. It is not sufficient to connect a protective conductor at the subrack. It must be a slightly accessible circuit breaker in the supply circuit. Interface modules with binary output function SB70, SB71 should be powered-up approximately 200 ms before the modules are powered-up to prevent power-on effects. This is achieved by simultaneously powering-up the subrack power supplies (this requires approximately 200 ms to establish the voltages) and the interface modules. 2-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks There are following fuses on the printed circuit board of the power supplies: NOTE 2.2.2 Power supply Fuse Type Voltage rated value SP22.5/SP23.5 F601 T4A H 250 V SP8.5 F400 T8A H 250 V The power supply PC boards are suitable for the connection to IT systems. 2 Voltage monitoring functions Input voltage The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage conditions. Input voltage Response Undervoltage: SRx.1/SRx.2: Green OK-LED goes dark < 20 V or SRx.3/SRx.4: < 170 ...175 V Overvoltage SRx.1/SRx.2: Output voltage The system automatically restarts when the input voltage increases to approx. 196 V. Red fault LED is lit; > 32 V or SRx.3/SRx.4: The output voltages are shutdown; CPU stop (DSAVE signal) > approx. 265 V The output voltages are shutdown, CPU stop (DSAVE signal) Automatic restart All of the output voltages are monitored for an undervoltage condition (e.g. as a result of overload/short-circuit) Undervoltages at the output Response V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V Red fault LED is lit (for t>100-200 s) The output voltages are shut down; (CPU stop) No automatic restart (the line supply voltage must be disconnected) V (+ 15 V) < approx. 14 V V (- 15 V) > approx. -14 V Red fault is lit 5V voltage remains System failure message System failure message The associated module (under the STOP" tab) is configured in HWConfig under "object properties" to define how the module behaves when a system failure message is output (bus signal *RDYIN=low): Modules can reset their binary and analog outputs CPU modules can go into the "stop" condition ("H") Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-15 Subracks 2.2.3 Battery back-up Battery connection A back-up battery can be installed in the power supply to save configured values during a power failure (using function block SAV) (nominal voltage, approx. 3.6 V). Current load: approx. 10 A depending on the particular CPU module It is recommended that the battery is changed every year. When removing the power supply (the defect, changing the fan) back-up is no longer possible. If required, the back-up voltage must be provided through the appropriate contact of the backplane connector. Battery type Lithium battery 3,4 V, 5 Ah Design C (Baby element) Battery voltage monitoring The monitoring CPU module identifies if there is no back-up battery or if the back-up battery is discharged (at slot 1; flashing "B"). Battery change The battery should be changed with the subrack powered-up to prevent data loss. If a supply voltage is not available, then a voltage must be applied via connector X3! ! WARNING For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration. ! DANGER When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material. There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries. Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and European legislation and regulations. The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder before the subrack or power supply is disposed of. 2-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks 2.2.4 Backplane buses All of the inserted modules receive their voltages and exchange data via 2 parallel backplane buses: Daisy chainjumpers L bus (local bus", below) C bus (communications bus", top) The bus uses the daisy chain principle where a CPU module accepts the token signal and then transfers it to the next CPU module. Thus, a daisy chain jumper must be inserted in all backplane bus PC board slots where there is no CPU module (or EPx signal processor module). If another module is inserted, the jumper is unimportant. The jumper must be correctly inserted up to the last (righthand) CPU module. A jumper is required if a module is not located at a connector. The two pins to insert the jumpers are located to the right of the backplane bus connector (96-pin socket connector). All of the jumpers are inserted when the equipment is shipped. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-17 2 Subracks Signal assignment, backplane connector X101 to X124 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C (C bus) X201 to X224 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C (L bus) The L- and C buses are essentially assigned the same. The signals with grey background are only available at the L bus. 2-18 Pin No. Row a Row b Row c 1 5V 5V 5V 2 AUX2 AB20 AB22 3 AUX1 AB21 AB23 4 +15V +15V +15V 5 AUX0 -15V -15V 6 *LOCK *CSPER *CSINI 7 5VEXT 5VEXT *RSERQ 8 Vcc AB12 AB0 9 *BATAL 0V AB1 10 *DSAD AB13 AB2 11 *DSAVE PLC0 AB3 12 AB19 AB14 AB4 13 *OUTDS PLC1 AB5 14 *RESET AB15 AB6 15 *BHE PLC2 AB7 16 *BRQ AB16 AB8 17 *BGIN PLC3 AB9 18 *BGOUT AB17 AB10 19 *BCLR PLC4 AB11 20 *IR0 AB18 DB0 21 *IR1 0V DB1 22 *IR2 DB11 DB2 23 *IR3 0V DB3 24 *RDYIN DB12 DB4 25 *RDY PRIVAT DB5 26 *WR DB13 DB6 27 *RD 0V DB7 28 CLK DB14 DB8 29 *CLK.M 0V DB9 30 *DEN DB15 DB10 31 *HWE RES SBR 32 DT/*R 0V SBT Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks 2.2.5 Ventilation/cooling The power supplies for SR12.1 and SR12.3 have 1 fan. The power supplies for SR24.1 and SR24.3 have 3 fans. The subracks do not have an air filter. If a filter is required, this must be provided at the cabinet. Fan monitoring The fans are monitored by the power supply (fan speed). At power-up, the monitoring is enabled with a time delay to ensure that the subrack reliably runs-up. If a fault condition develops, a message is output via a relay contact (24 V, 100 mA) at connector X2, pins 3 and 4: ! WARNING Relay contact closed: Fault-free operation Relay contact open : Faulted operation; or the subrack has no fan The subrack may not be used if the fan has a fault, as reliable operation of the boards cannot be guaranteed due to the danger of excessive temperature rise. Fan change It is recommended that the fan is changed after approximately 40,000 operating hours at a 50 C ambient temperature. The power supply must be removed. The bottom panel is completely changed, together with the fans. The battery back-up is interrupted when the fan is changed (refer to the appropriate section. Self-convection The cabinet must have cooling air slots if the subracks are not equipped with fans. 2.2.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity Ground connections Bus PC board Ground Permanent connection 24 V electrical isolation Power supply Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 SIMADYN D subrack 2-19 2 Subracks The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting studs through a min. 6 mm cable which should be kept as short as possible. Potential bonding using the PE pin of supply connector X1 is not sufficient! EMC All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor of at least 16 mm. Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers (SR81, SR82, SR83). All modules must be screwed into the subrack. No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with SIMADYN D. If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D, the cabinet must have a metal partition between them. The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential. Before removing the power supply, the connecting cables must be disconnected. The connecting cables must first be disconnected from the supply so that they are in a no-voltage condition! The screens of screen cables must be directly connected to the grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still screened. NOTE 2-20 Additional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data"! Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks 2.2.7 Technical data Input voltages Supply voltages DC-input 24 V DC DC 24 V SR12.1 SR12.2 SR24.1 SR24.2 Input voltage range 20 ... 30 V 20 ... 30 V Input current 16 A 32 A 2 Non-periodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2 Max. voltage 35 V Duration 500 ms Recovery time, min. 50 s Events per hour - Brief voltage dips acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3 Voltage 0V Duration 5 ms Recovery time, min. 0.1 s Events per hour max. 10 Input voltages Connecting voltages AC-input AC 115/230 V AC 115/230 V SR12.3 SR12.4 SR24.3 Input voltage range + 10% / - 15% + 10% / - 15% Input frequency 47.5-62.5 Hz 47.5-62.5 Hz Input current 4/2A 9/4A Aperiodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2 Max. voltage 460 V Duration 1.3 ms Recovery time at least 0.1 s Events per hour max. 10 Short-term voltage drops acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Voltage 0V Duration 10 ms Recovery time at least 10 s Events per hour - 2-21 Subracks Output voltages Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V Output current SR12: 0 to 26 A SR24: 0 to 52 A Ripple < 50 mVpp Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V) Base load Guaranteed when a CPU module is inserted Overvoltage protection With suppressor diode, to protect the modules Stabilization time < 80 ms after Uin= 230 V; <1 ms after a load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V Output current SR12: 0 to 3.3 A SR24: 0 to 6.5 A Ripple < 150 mVpp Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module which requires this voltage Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V Output current SR12: 0 to 3.0 A SR24: 0 to 6.0 A Ripple < 150 mVpp Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module which requires this voltage General data SR12 SR24 Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 298.5 x 508.5 x 320 542 x 508.5 x 320 Weight 10.5 - 11 kg 16.2 - 17.3 kg Radio interference suppression level 2-22 Limit value class B acc. to VDE 0871 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks 2.2.8 Dimension drawings + + 230 VAC/ 24 VDC 230 V BATTERY 3,7V/5Ah S01 1 2 2 + + 110 V 1 2 + + + SIMADYND A SIEMENS POWER SUPPLY FAN OK OK 12 34 S12 S02 + + + C bus + + + + L bus Protective conductor/ potential bonding + + + + + + B Explanation: Subrack SR12 (Front view) Cable retention Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-23 Subracks SIMADYND SIEMENS + ++ A 230 VAC/ 24 VDC BATTERY 3,7V/5Ah 110 V 1 2 S01 + ++ + + ++ 230 V 1 2 POWER SUPPLY FAN OK OK 12 34 S24 S02 + ++ + C bus ++ + + ++ L bus + Protective conductor/potential bonding M5 + + + + + B Explanation: Subrack SR24 (front view) Cable retention 2-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks Power supply + 2 + L bus C bus + + + Cable duct Subracks SR12 and SR24 (Section A-B) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-25 Subracks 2.3 Subrack SRT400 Order No. Order No. Supply voltage Fan Power supply type 6DD1682-0CG0 AC 115/230 V no Integrated Description SRT400 is a compact subrack for open-loop and control tasks that have a technological orientation. Number of slots It is comparable with the electronics box of the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES. The following boards can be inserted in the SRT400. up to two T400 technology boards one T400 and one MASTERDRIVES communications board (e.g. CB1, ADB, ...) In addition to the T400, no other SIMADYN D boards can be inserted in the subrack. Using these components, for example, functions can be expanded at a reasonable price and existing plants/systems modernized. The drives can be controlled via analog or serial interfaces - such as Profibus DP, USS or peer- to -peer. 2.3.1 Power supply The power supply is a plug-in unit and is permanently located in the righthand slot of the subrack. It is interlocked using screws so that it cannot slide out. It is self-ventilated. It cannot be separately ordered. Front panel elements Green LED: Error-free operation Connection for the line supply voltage 24V supply for the digital (binary) outputs of the T400 Voltage selector switch (115 V / 230 V) Supply connection The incoming line supply voltage 115V/230V is connected through a 3-pin screw terminal. The connection assignment is stamped on the front plate: Line supply connection Significance Protective conductor L Phase conductor N Neutral conductor It is possible to toggle between rated input voltages of 230 V and 115 V using the voltage selector switch (slide switch). 2-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks The value that has been selected can be seen when the switch is set. ! NOTE An isolating device that is easy to access must be provided in the power circuit. WARNING The protective conductor must be connected at the line supply connector. It is not sufficient to connect the protective conductor at the subrack itself. There are following fuses on the printed circuit board of the power supplies: Fuses F1: F2: 2.3.2 2 T800 mA H T800 mA H 250 V (line supply) 250 V (line supply) NOTE Caution: Two-pole fuse NOTE The power supply PC board is suitable for the connection to IT systems. Voltage monitoring functions Input voltage The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage conditions. Input voltage (Vrated = 1-ph. 230 V AC) Response Undervoltage: < 170 V The output voltages are shutdown; CPU stop (DSAVE signal) After the power supply voltage has been shutdown and the input voltage increases to approx. 195 V, then the system automatically restarts. Input voltage (Vrated = 1-ph. 115 V AC) Response Overvoltage < 95 V The output voltages are shutdown; CPU stop (DSAVE signal) After the power supply voltage has been shutdown and the input voltage increases to approx. 100 V, then the system automatically restarts. Output voltage Undervoltages at the output Response V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V Green OK-LED goes dark (for t>100-200 s) The output voltages are shutdown (CPU stop) The system does not automatically restart (the line supply voltage must be switched-out) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-27 Subracks 2.3.3 Battery back-up The SRT400 subrack does not have a buffer (back-up) battery. 2.3.4 Backplane bus The power supply for the boards and the data exchange is realized via the backplane bus. 2.3.5 Ventilation/cooling The SRT400 subrack is designed for natural air cooling. Discharged air The warm air discharged from the subrack must be able to be dissipated to the surrounding environment: Other mounted components may not restrict the hot discharged air When mounting equipment or other components a minimum clearance of 60 mm must be maintained above and below the subrack If the subrack is mounted in an electrical cabinet, then the cabinet cooling must be ensured using ventilation slots. If two subracks are located one above the other then a minimum clearance of 120 mm must be maintained between the two subracks; an air deflection plate must be provided so that the hot discharged air of the lower subrack does not pass through to the second subrack. 2.3.6 EMC Mounting guidelines and noise immunity The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting studs through a min. 6 mm cable which should be kept as short as possible. Potential bonding using the PE pin of supply connector is not sufficient! All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor of at least 16 mm. All modules must be screwed into the subrack. No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with SIMADYN D. If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D, the cabinet must have a metal partition between them. The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential. 2-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks The screens of screen cables must be directly connected to the grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still screened. NOTE 2.3.7 Additional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data"! 2 Technical data Input voltages AC power supply according to DIN IEC 38 Supply voltages (can be set using the voltage selector switch) AC 115 V AC 230 V Input voltage range 10% 10% Input frequency 47-63 Hz 47-63 Hz Input current 0.8 A 0.4 A Non-periodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2 Voltage 460 V Duration 1.3 ms Recovery time, min 0.1 s Events per hour max. 10 Brief voltage dips acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3 Output voltages Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Voltage 0V Duration 5 ms Recovery time, min 0.1 s Events per hour max. 10 Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V Output current 3A Ripple < 50 mVss Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V) Overvoltage protection With suppressor diode, to protect the modules Stabilization time < 80 ms after Uin= 230 V; <1 ms after a load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V Output current 0 to 0.5 A Ripple < 150 mVss 2-29 Subracks General data Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V Output current 0 to 0.2 A Ripple < 150 mVss Output voltage +24 V +24 V ( 20-30 V) Output current 0 to 0.6 A Time that it takes for the output voltages to establish themselves Approx. 200 ms after the power supply voltage has been applied Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 90.5 x 291 x 168.5 Weight 2 kg Radio interference suppression level Limit value class B acc. to VDE 0871 Ventilation Natural air cooling Line supply connection Phonix, type Front 2,5H cable cross-section max. 2,5mm Screw/plug-in terminal 3 pin 24V output terminal Screw/plug-in terminal 2 pin 2-30 Phonix, type Front 2,5H cable cross-section max. 2,5mm Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Subracks Dimension drawing 2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 2-31 Subracks 2-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 3 CPU module Overview Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 3.1 CPU module PM5 3-2 3.2 CPU module PM6 3-11 3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x 3-17 3-1 3 CPU module 3.1 CPU module PM5 Order No. 6DD1600-0AJ0 Description The CPU module processes general open- and closed-loop tasks. In addition to * max. 8 binary inputs, it also has the possibility to connect up to * 2 absolute value encoders * 2 incremental encoders. Performance data Computational performance: 32 MHz, 32 bit RISC processor DRAM 4 Mbytes (EDO) SRAM 64 Kbytes This CPU module permits fast cycle times of 0.1 ms. A typical application (e. g. control loop) can be configured in approx. 0.6 ms. DRAM The DRAM contains: * program code (is loaded and expanded when the memory module is initialized) * data memory for the operating system, communications, message buffer, trace function If the DRAM is not large enough for complex applications, a PM6 (with 8Mbyte DRAM) must be used. SRAM, buffered The buffered SRAM (using either a battery in the subrack or an external battery) contains the following data, which are to be saved during and after a power failure: * operating system error diagnostics (exception buffer") * max. 1000 process quantities configured with function block SAV * data recorded/traced using the message system or trace function (can be optionally configured on the SRAM) Programming The program, running on the CPU module, is configured on a PC using STEP7/HWConfig and CFC. This is then loaded into an MS5 program memory module (or MS51). The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle provided on the CPU module. The user program can be loaded in 2 ways: * via an PCMCIA card installed in the PC-programming adapter (offline loading) * directly from the PC via a serial communications connection in the memory module inserted in the CPU module (online loading) 3-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module Program size The size of the software to be loaded in the memory module (compressed to approx. 50%) and the size of the available program memory is displayed in CFC under the following menu item: Target system \ Load \ Info MS5, MS51 The program is loaded in a program memory module MS5, 2 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM MS51, 4 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM A MS51 memory module which could be used with the PM5 may only be used up to approx. 50 % so that the expanded code can be accepted on the PM5. Serial service interface An RS 232 interface (V.24) with service protocol DUST1 with 19.2 kbd is permanently installed in connector X01 (9-pin sub-D socket). It is used to: * test and commission the user program (using CFC or "IBS") * loading the user program from the PC (only in this module) Inputs The connections available at the 10-pin connector X5 (8 signals and ground) are functionally sub-divided into 2 groups, each with 4 inputs: Pins Function 1...4 Bin. input 1...4 Absolute value encoder 1 Incremental encoder 1 5...8 Bin. input 5...8 Absolute value encoder 2 Incremental encoder 2 A plug-in socket is provided on the PM5 for each of the 6 functions. A function is not selected by configuring, but by inserting a coded connector into the associated socket. Selection The available connections can therefore be used for one of the following combinations of functions: * 8 binary inputs or * 4 binary inputs and 1 absolute value encoder or * 4 binary inputs and 1 incremental encoder or * 1 absolute value encoder and 1 incremental encoder or * 2 absolute value encoders or * 2 incremental encoders Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 3-3 3 CPU module Bin.In1..4 Absolut.1 Increm.1 Function Pins 1...4 select one Function only! Bin.In5..8 Absolut.2 Increm.2 Function Pins 5...8 select one Function only! Fig. 3-1 Slots for coding connectors to select the functions for connector X5 (in this case, an absolute value encoder 1 and incremental encoder 2 have been selected) NOTE Only one coding connector may be inserted in each socket row (pins 1..4 or pins 5..8). A connection can only be assigned one function. Incremental encoders Uni-polar 15V encoders (HTL) with 2 tracks, displaced through 90, A, B and if required zero pulse, can be connected for closed-loop speed- or position controls. Absolute value encoder SSI, EnDat Encoders with SSI- or EnDat protocol can be connected for positioning tasks. Interface modules The screw terminals for the connections are provided via interface modules (can be connected using cable SC7): Interface module Function SB10 SU10 If at least 1 encoder connection is used (electrical 1:1 connection) SB60 SB61 Optionally to SB10/SU10, if only binary inputs are used (with electrical isolation and signal conversion) Table 3-1 Possible interface modules for PM5 3-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 7-segment display In normal operation, the configured number of the CPU module (1...8) is displayed. When an error occurs, a letter is displayed, which refers to the error type. Possible operating- and error statuses: Display can be deleted with key Display Operating- and error statuses 1...8 Configured number of the CPU module in normal operation - A User error: with function block USF from the diagnostics event defined by the user. This has no influence on the program run. yes Initialization phase - - 3 individual initialization steps are displayed with increasing numbers during the run-up phase . 5V available; no program is being executed - 0 Error during initialization: the user program does not start if errors occur when the system is being initialized. Initialization error due to erroneous or incorrectly inserted modules for the actual software which has been configured: no * flashing 0": Error on this module * steady 0": Error on other modules * continuous: Error when loading the system software Start diagnostics at the CPU module, which first displayed the "0" error message. If you cannot identify which CPU module was the first to have displayed the error message, then you should start with that CPU module which displays a "0" and is inserted farthest to the left. b Monitoring error * e.g. missing, discharged buffer battery * background processing error * when initializing non-critical error which permits standard operation to start yes C Communications error erroneous configured communications or connection no d * no steady "d": Module is in the STOP mode; selection in the Target system/operating mode" menu; software is still not being downloaded * flashing "d": Data is being downloaded in the STOP mode is faster than download in the RUN mode (runs in the background) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 3-5 CPU module Display Operating- and error statuses E Task administrator error: H Display can be deleted with key yes * cycle error a task was not able to be processed within the sampling time * task backup if the task is not designated as a high-priority task, and has to be re-started. * no free local buffer the data buffer is no longer enabled. Task start is skipped. * software watchdog if the base sampling time is not processed for four consecutive times. The basic clock timer is reinitialized with the configured base sampling time and processing is continued. Fatal system error: hardware or software problem which cause a program crash: no Display: * flashing H": Fault/error on this module * steady H": Fault/error on another module Additional information on diagnostics refer to the Manual "SIMADYN D Basis Software for D7-SYS". Button S1 The button has 2 functions: * Deleting the error display: By depressing button S1, sporadic errors (E") or non-critical errors (b") appearing in the display can be deleted. If another error is present, this is displayed after the first has been acknowledged. * Binary signal input with function block ASI Real-time clock Resolution, 0.1 ms; e. g. to time stamp messages Software protection A plug-in socket for a 28-pin EPLD device is provided on the module (ALTERA company) so that the user program can be copy-protected (Hardlock PAL"). Using a special function block, this EPLD device can be checked and program stopped if the code is missing or is incorrect. Additional information on request. 3-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 3.1.1 Supplementary components * MS5 and MS51 program memory modules * cable SC57 for PC connection, 9-core, 5 m * cable SC7 to connect an interface module, 10-core, 2 m If additional input/output signals and other functions are required, then these can be implemented by inserting a maximum of 2 expansion modules; the types are subsequently listed: * IT41 3 * IT42 * ITDC * ITSL 3.1.2 Application information and noise immunity * operation without fan is possible * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack * do not insert or withdraw the module when the subrack is powered-up Other information For more information regarding EMC and ambient conditions, refer to the Section General technical data" 3.1.3 Connector assignments Serial interface X01 RS 232 Pin Designation Comment 2 RxD Receive data 3 TxD Transmit data 5 M Ground 7 RTS Request to send (1") Table 3-2 Connector assignment X01 Binary- and encoder inputs X5 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Pin As binary input As absolute value encoder (SSI or EnDat) As incremental encoder (15V) 1 Binary input 1 SSI1: Data + Encoder 1: Track A 2 Binary input 2 SSI1: Data - Encoder 1: Track B 3-7 CPU module Pin As binary input As absolute value encoder (SSI or EnDat) As incremental encoder (15V) 3 Binary input 3 SSI1: Clock + Encoder 1: Zero pulse 4 Binary input 4 SSI1: Clock - - 5 Binary input 5 SSI2: Data + Encoder 2: Track A 6 Binary input 6 SSI2: Data - Encoder 2: Track B 7 Binary input 7 SSI2: Clock + Encoder 2: Zero pulse 8 Binary input 8 SSI2: Clock - - 9 + 15 V Encoder power supply 10 Ground Table 3-3 Connector assignment X5 3.1.4 Technical data General data Power supply No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.7 kg Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1200 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 35 mA + encoder load (max. 100 mA, electronic. limited) -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 35 mA 20 V 30 V 24 V (external) Binary inputs No. Typical current drain 100 mA + binary output currents Depending on the selection via coding plug: 0 no coding plug at sockets X5A... 4 coding plug at 1 socket X5A... 8 2 coding plugs at both sockets X5A... of which, max. 4 are interrupt-capable +24 V rated voltage Input voltage for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or binary inputs open-circuit for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V for 0 signal 0 mA Input current for 1 signal 3-8 3 mA typ. Input delay Max. 20 s Electrical isolation No; only via SB60, SB61 interface modules Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 3.1.5 Connector assignments Serial interface X01 RS 232 Pin Designation Comment 2 RxD Receive data 3 TxD Transmit data 5 M Ground 7 RTS Request to Send (1") Table 3-4 Binary- and encoder inputs X5 3 Pin As binary input As absolute value encoder (SSI oder EnDat) 1 binary input 1 Encoder1: Data + Encoder1: Track A 2 binary input 2 Encoder1: Data - Encoder1: Track B 3 binary input 3 Encoder1: Clock + Encoder1: Zero pulse 4 binary input 4 Encoder1: Clock - - 5 binary input 5 Encoder2: Data + Encoder2: Track A 6 binary input 6 Encoder2: Data - Encoder2: Track B 7 binary input 7 Encoder2: Clock + Encoder2: Zero pulse 8 binary input 8 Encoder2: Clock - - 9 + 15 V Encoder power supply (100 mA current limited) 10 Ground Table 3-5 Specification absolute value encoder Connector assignment X01 As incremental encoder (15V) Connector assignment X5 SSI-Protokoll EnDat-Protokoll Pegel RS 485 RS 485 max. frequence 2 MHz 2 MHz Data direction unidirectional bidireCtional Data bits 13 + Parity variabel (max. 33) 25 + Parity Codierung Table 3-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Gray Gray Binar Binar Specification absolute value encoder 3-9 CPU module 3.1.6 Connection diagram PM5 C bus X01 Serial interface (service) L bus 9pin Optional X5 8 binary inputs BI, 10pin of which 4 are interrupt-capable 2 abs. value encoders 2 incremental encoders SC57 ( cable 1) each 9 core Oper. control unit (PC) COM1/2 l=5m SC7 (each, 10 core) l=2m 8 inputs SB10 SB60 SB61 or SU12 Fig. 3-2 Connecting cables and interface modules 3-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 3.2 CPU module PM6 Order No. 6DD1600-0AK0 Description The CPU module processes open- and closed-loop tasks which demand an extremely high computational performance, or where the program is very large. They have * 8 binary inputs, of which a maximum of 4 can be used to call-up interrupt tasks. Performance data Computational performance: 64/128 MHz, 32/64 bit RISC processor DRAM 8 MByte (SD), version with 16Mbyte SRAM 256 KByte 3 The CPU module permits extremely fast cycle times of 0.1 ms. A typical application (e.g. control loop) can be configured in approx. 0.5 ms. DRAM The DRAM contains: * Program code (is loaded and expanded when the memory module is initialized) * Data memory for the operating system, communications, message buffer, trace function SRAM, buffered The buffered SRAM (using either a battery in the subrack or an external battery) contains the following data, which are to be saved during and after a power failure: * Operating system error diagnostics ("exception buffer) * Max. 1000 process quantities, configured with the function block SAV * Data recorded/traced using the message system or trace function (can be optionally configured on the SRAM) Programming The program, running on the CPU module, is configured on a PC using STEP7/HWConfig and CFC. This is then loaded into an MS5 program memory module (or MS51). The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle provided on the CPU module. The user program can be loaded in two ways: * via a PCMCIA card installed in the PC-programming adapter (offline loading) * directly from the PC via a serial communications connection in the memory module inserted in the CPU module (online loading) Program size The size of the software to be loaded in the memory module (compressed to approx. 50% and the size of the available program memory is displayed in CFC under the following menu item: Target system \ Load \ Info Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 3-11 CPU module MS5, MS51, MS52 Serial service interface The program is loaded in a program memory module * MS5 2 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM * MS51 4 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM * MS52 8 MByte Flash-EPROM, 8 KByte EEPROM An RS 232 interface (V.24) with service protocol DUST 1 with 19.2 kbaud is permanently installed in connector X01 (9-pin sub-D socket). It is used to: * test and commission the user program (using CFC or "basic IBS") * loading the user program from the PC (only in this module) Binary inputs 8 binary inputs can be connected at the 10-pin connector X5. Interface modules The screw terminals for the binary inputs are available via the interface modules (can be connected using cable SC7): Interface module Function SB10, SU10 Electrical 1:1 connection SB60, SB61 With electrical isolation (floating) and signal conversion Table 3-7 Possible interface modules for PM6 3-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 7-segment display In normal operation, the configured number of the CPU module (1...8) is displayed. When an error occurs, a letter is displayed, which refers to the error type. Possible operating- and error statuses: Display can be deleted with key Display Operating- and error statuses 1...8 Configured number of the CPU module in normal operation - A User error: with function block USF from the diagnostics event defined by the user. This has no influence on the program run yes - Initialization phase - 3 Individual initialization steps are displayed with increasing numbers during the run-up phase . 5V available; no program is being executed - 0 Error during initialization: the user program does not start if errors occur when the system is being initialized. Initialization error due to erroneous or incorrectly inserted modules for the actual software which has been configured: no * flashing 0": Error on this module * steady 0": Error on other modules * continuous: Error when loading the system software Start diagnostics at the CPU module, which first displayed the "0" error message. If you cannot identify which CPU module was the first to have displayed the error message, then you should start with that CPU module which displays a "0" and is inserted farthest to the left. b Monitoring error * e.g. missing, discharged buffer battery * background processing error * when initializing non-critical error which permits standard operation to start C Erroneous configured communications or connection no d * steady "d": Module is in the STOP mode; selection in the Target system/operating status" menu; software is still not being downloaded no * flashing "d": Data is being downloaded in the STOP mode is faster than download in the RUN mode (runs in the background) E Task administrator error: * Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 yes yes cycle error a task was not able to be processed within the 3-13 CPU module Display Display can be deleted with key Operating- and error statuses sampling time * task backup if the task is not designated as a high-priority task, and has to be re-started. * no free local buffer the data buffer is no longer enabled. Task start is skipped. software watchdog if the base sampling time is not processed for four consecutive times. The basic clock timer is reinitialized with the configured base sampling time and processing is continued. H Fatal system error: no hardware or software problem which caused a program crash: Display: * flashing H": Fault/error on this module * steady H": Fault/error on another module Additional information on diagnostics refer to the Manual "SIMADYN D Basis Software for D7-SYS Button S1 The button has 2 functions: * Deleting the error display: By depressing button S1, sporadic errors ("E") or non-critical errors ("B") appearing in the display can be deleted. If another error is present, this is displayed after the first has been acknowledged. * Binary signal input with function block ASI Real-time clock Resolution 0.1 ms; e.g. to time stamp messages; An MM3 coupling memory module must be used as time source if the time is to be backed-up during power failures. Software protection 3-14 A plug-in socket for a 28-pin EPLD device is provided on the module (ALTERA company) so that the user program can be copy-protected (Hardlock-PAL"). Using a special function block, this EPLD device can be checked and the program stopped if the code is missing or is incorrect. Additional information on request. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 3.2.1 Supplementary components * MS5 and MS51 program memory modules * Cable SC57 for PC connection, 9-core, 5 m * Cable SC7 to connect an interface module, 10-core, 2 m If additional input/output signals and other functions are required, then these can be implemented by inserting a maximum of 2 expansion modules: * IT41 3 * IT42 * ITDC * ITSL 3.2.2 Application information and noise immunity * Operation without fan is not possible * Noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack * Do not insert or withdraw the module when the subrack is powered-up Other information For more information regarding EMC and ambient conditions, refer to the section "General technical data"! 3.2.3 Technical data General data Power supply Number of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight approx. 0.51 kg Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1700 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 50 mA -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 30 mA 20 V 30 V 24 V (external) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Typical current drain 100 mA + binary output currents 3-15 CPU module Binary inputs No. 8 of which, max. 4 are interrupt-capable +24 V rated voltage Input voltage for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or binary inputs open-circuit for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V for 0 signal 0 mA for 1 signal 3 mA typ. Input current Input delay max. 20 s Electrical isolation no; only via SB60, SB61 interface modules 3.2.4 Connection diagram PM6 C bus X01 Serial interface (service) L bus 9 pin X5 8 binary inputs BI, 10pin of which 4 are interrupt-capable SC57 ( Cable 1) each 9 core Oper. control unit (PC) COM1/2 l=5m SC7 (each, 10 core.) l=2m SB10 8 BI (Binary inputs) SB60 SB61 or SU12 Fig. 3-3 Connecting cables and interface modules 3-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 CPU module 3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x Order No. Description 6DD1645-0AE0 The EP3 module is used for special applications. Especially for fast closedloop control and arithmetic operations involving converter-related functions including the gating unit and fast analog signal processing (digital filter). The EP3 has a DSP56002 signal processor. The module is configured in HWConfig (the board is inserted in the SIMADYN D station). IS_1, IS_2 and IS_3 It includes interfaces to plug-in technology cards IS_1, IS_2 and IS_3, which can optimally adapt the peripheral hardware to the particular task. They are also configured in HWConfig (the module is inserted in the SIMADYN D station). NOTE You will find a detailed description and technical data on EP3 in the following documentation "Hardware description large drives" Order No.: 6DD2921-0XH10. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 3-17 3 CPU module 3-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 4 Coupling memory module Overview 4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4 4-2 4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 4-1 Coupling memory module 4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4 Order No. MM11: 6DD1611-0AD0 MM3: 6DD1611-0AF0 MM4: 6DD1611-0AG0 Application A coupling memory module has a data memory (RAM), which is used to transfer data via the CPU modules. A coupling memory module must always be used if there is more than one CPU module in a subrack, and if the CPU modules wish to transfer data within the module. For instance, using configured $ connections", coupling memory module coupling" or if several CPU modules access a CS7 serial interface. Slot A coupling memory module can be inserted at any slot between the first and second CPU module. 1st CPU module Coupling memory module 2nd CPU module nth CPU module Bus system Features Bus connection Memory size Other functions MM11 MM3 MM4 L bus, L bus, L bus, C bus C bus C bus 2 * 64 Kbytes 2 * 64 Kbytes 2 * 2 Mbytes * System error- System error-relay; relay; * Radio clock * Data is buffered against power failure using a back-up battery (3.4 V) in the subrack * Integrated bus termination for the C bus and L bus 4-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Coupling memory module 4.1.1 Real-time clock in the MM3 coupling memory module The MM3 coupling memory module includes, in addition to the buffer function, also a real-time clock, which can be set and synchronized via a * DCF-77 radio signal An additional dual port RAM connected to the L bus provides the clock time to other functions in the CPU modules (e. g. message system). To realize this, the MM3 must be configured as real-time source on the 1st CPU module with function block RTCM. Data back-up The clock time (time of day) is buffered by the subrack back-up battery. MM3 + MM4 An MM3 can be inserted, together with an MM4 in a SIMADYN D subrack to use the large MM4 memory, and to utilize the buffered real-time clock of the MM3. In this case, the MM3 can be inserted at any subrack slot. The MM3 memory is not used. Front panel elements * 10-digit, 7-segment displays H1 - H10 for seconds, minutes, hours, months, days located under one another in pairs (from top to bottom) * 2 keys to manually set the clock * 4 LEDs for status displays * Screw/plug-in terminal (X5) for system error signal relay: When a CPU module identifies a fatal error, normal operation is aborted; the subrack goes into the STOP condition, the relay opens when an error occurs * Screw/plug-in terminal (X6) is prepared for IRIG-B audio signal; this functionality has still not been implemented! * BNC socket (X7) for DCF-77 antenna connection * 1 double test socket for the reset signal (X10/X11) to reset the module (caution: This must only be used for test purposes!) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 4-3 4 Coupling memory module 7-segment LED control Coupling memory module C bus 32K X 16 CPU Input IRIG-B Output RDYIN Statusanzeige 80C186 RDYINrelay Data- control- and address bus C bus Clock module Time dual-port RAM 2K X 8 Communications buffer L bus DCF77 receiver and IRIG-B converter 32K X 16 L bus Fig. 4-1 MM3 block diagram Note: Led H1 (seconds) is located at the top, H10 (days) at the bottom! Radio clock DCF-77 The time is synchronized (time of day setting) via antenna using the DCF-77 radio signal. This signal can be received in Central Europe. A differentiation is made between the following antennas: * antenna for inside installation * antenna for outside installation The antenna must be aligned so that optimum reception is guaranteed. Generally, this is towards Frankfurt/Main, where the signal transmitter is located. The BNC socket X7 at the front panel is used to connect the antenna. 4-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Coupling memory module NOTE The antenna for outdoor installation normally ensures better reception, as the rooms, in which SIMADYN D is used, are generally screened and/or can accommodate devices/equipment which emit noise radiation. Time displayRadio clock DCF-77:Time display If the time display flashes, then the time hasn't been set after power-up (voltage on). Setting the clock time The clock can be set in 3 different ways: * using the DCF-77 radio signal: The clock is set using the antenna signal when the appropriate data is configured at the IS input of function block RTCM, an antenna is connected and the reception conditions are OK (refer below). The complete time of day is received after approximately 2 minutes as a result of the telegram data transfer time of the DCF-77. The clock display flashes for this time after power-up. * when the signal at input IS changes from 0 to 1 at function block RTCM, the time of day, available at its connections, is transferred. * the time of day can always be manually set using two keys: - using upper key S1, all numerical pairs (digit pairs) of the 7-segment display are selected one after the other. They flash after they have been selected. - using lower key S2, a 1" is added to the value in the flashing display, each time the key is depressed. When seconds is selected the value is set to zero. - after the seconds display has been selected, the next time that S1 is depressed, the year is displayed on the two upper digit pairs (H1, H2) - the year - can be set. - after all of the digit pairs have been selected, the next time that S1 is depressed, the setting mode is exited. The display stops flashing. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 4-5 4 Coupling memory module Receive status LEDs H20 to H23 are loaded on the front panel. They indicate the status of the clock receiver (time of day receiver). LED Color Function Description H20 Green Lit The module has been initialized to receive the DCF77 signal Dark The module has been initialized to receive the IRIG-B signal H21 H22 H23 Ordering data, radio clock antenna Red Green Red Flashes in a The time signal is second rhythm received Lit The signal does not contain information check the signal cable! Dark The time signal contains incorrect information Lit The information is received for at least 10 seconds in the correct format Lit Time telegram error Dark Decoding running Order designation Supplier FG443610 antenna for indoor installation 4436 (long distance) Hopf Elektronik Nottebohmstr. 41 58511 Ludenscheid FG441800 antenna for outdoor installation 4418 4-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Coupling memory module 4.1.2 Technical data MM11, MM3, MM4 General data Power supply voltage No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight MM11: Approx. 0.51 kg Rated voltage +5 V +15 V Back-up battery System error relay Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 MM3: 0.7 kg MM4: 0.5 kg min. max. +4.75 V +5.25 V Typ. current drain MM11: 300 mA MM3: 600 mA MM4: 800 mA 50 mA +14.4 V +15.6 V MM3: 2.2 V 3.9 V 20 A 4 RDYIN signal output for MM3 and MM4: Description Values Voltage max. 60 V DC Switching current max. 0,5 A NC contact interrupt time 100 ms Switching power max. 20 W 4-7 Coupling memory module 4-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 5 Input/output modules Overview Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5.1 Input/output modules EA12 5-2 5.2 Input/output module EB11 5-7 5.3 Expansion module IT41 5-16 5.4 Expansion module IT42 5-33 5.5 Converter control ITDC 5-45 5-1 Input/output modules 5.1 Input/output modules EA12 Order No. Features Load capability Adjustment, temperature 6DD1642-0BC0 * 8 analog outputs * 20-pin connector for the analog outputs * 8 test socket pairs (2.3 mm) on the front panel to connect measuring equipment (for start-up) * L bus connection An analog output (signal at the connector and interface module and at the test socket) can be loaded up to 10 mA and is short-circuit proof for 2 min. The manufacturer adjusts the outputs as far as offset and gain are concerned for an ambient temperature of approximately 20 C: This adjustment is made using 2 potentiometers for each output, which are not sealed so that they can be re-adjusted in operation (e. g. due to different ambient temperatures). The temperature dependency is max. approx. +/-240 V at a temperature change of +/-1 C. Analog output Offset Gain Output 1 -R49 -R46 Output 2 -R55 -R52 Output 3 -R61 -R58 Output 4 -R67 -R64 Output 5 -R73 -R70 Output 6 -R79 -R76 Output 7 -R85 -R82 Output 8 -R91 -R88 Table 5-1 Adjustment potentiometers for analog outputs Adjustment Noise signals at the outputs The module should be operated for approx. 2 min before any adjustment is made so that it has time to reach its operating temperature. The offset adjustment is first made. The value 0.0 (0%) should be output in the configured software at the connection of the associated function block, and the associated offset potentiometer should be adjusted until 0 V is measured. The output voltage is increased by rotating the potentiometer clockwise. The gain is then adjusted. The associated analog output should be driven with 2.0 (200%) (configured software) and the associated offset potentiometer should be adjusted until 10 V is measured. The switch-mode power supply causes voltage spikes (these can be measured up to 100 mV) on the ground cable. They can be suppressed by: * smoothing at the load input * low-ohmic load 5.1.1 Supplementary components Interface modules with terminals 5-2 All of the cables for the output signals are not directly connected at the module, but via interface modules. The interface modules serve as mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) and toelectrically adapt the system/plant signals (optional). Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Interface module Function SU11 20 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion Table 5-2 Interface modules which can be connected at the module Cables * The module is connected to the interface modules using matching plug-in cables: * SC12 to connect an SU11 5 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-3 Input/output modules 5.1.2 Connector assignment X5 SU11 terminal assignment EA12 X5 Significance Associated test socket SU11 Connector designation when configuring 1 Analog output 1 X11 SIG 1 X5A 2 Ground X11 COM 2 3 4 Analog output 2 X12 SIG 3 Ground X12 COM 4 5 Analog output 3 X13 SIG 5 6 Ground X13 COM 6 7 Analog output 4 X14 SIG 7 8 Ground X14 COM 8 9 Analog output 5 X15 SIG 9 10 Ground X15 COM 10 11 Analog output 6 X16 SIG 11 12 Ground X16 COM 12 13 Analog output 7 X17 SIG 13 14 Ground X17 COM 14 15 Analog output 8 X18 SIG 15 16 Ground X18 COM 16 17 Electronics ground --- 17 --- 18 X5B X5C X5D X5E X5F X5G X5H (connected with the electronics ground via 0 Ohm resistor) 18 Electronics ground (connected with the electronics ground via 0 Ohm resistor) 19 Ground --- 19 20 Ground --- 20 Table 5-3 EA12 connector- and SU11 terminal assignment All of the "ground" terminals are connected together via 0 Ohm resistors and are connected to electronics ground via an associated inductance. 5.1.3 Application information and noise immunity Screening 5-4 * operation without fan is possible * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack The input/output signals must be screened on the plant/system side. The screen must be connected through the largest possible surface area to the screen rail between the interface module and where the cable enters or exits the cabinet. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Ground connections Other information The front panel and if relevant, a connector housing, initially have no contact to the electronics ground of the module. The front panel is only connected to the electronics ground of the module via the backplane bus connector (L/C bus connection) and a cable connection, which can be released, between the backplane bus and the subrack housing. Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data" 5.1.4 Technical data General data Power supply Analog outputs No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.5 kg Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 600 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 200 mA -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 200 mA No. 8 Output voltage, min. - 10 V Output voltage, max. + 10 V Output current +/- 10 mA max. Output current (at +/- 10 V) 5 +/- 5 mA (recommended to suppress noise) Resolution 13 bits + sign (corresponds to 1 mV) Accuracy 14 bits (corresponds to 1 mV) Short-circuit protection to ground With 56 Ohm resistor Short-circuit duration 120 s Total load All outputs simultaneously, each 10 mA Temperature dependency Max. 240 V/degrees Error Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 absolute linearity +/-0.6 mV differential linearity +/- 1 mV monotony 14 bits (corresponds to 1 mV) 5-5 Input/output modules 5.1.5 Connecting diagram EA12 X5 SC12 8 analog outp. AO 20pin l=2m 8 AO SU11 L bus Fig. 5-1 Connecting cables and interface modules 5-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.2 Input/output module EB11 Order No. Features Overload protection 6DD1641-0AC0 * 32 binary inputs and outputs * 2 40-pin connectors * 2*8 binary inputs and outputs per connector * binary outputs with thermal overload protection * 2 LED keys to reset after an overload condition * L-bus connection An overloaded binary output due to an excessively high current (thermal overload, e. g. short-circuit) is electronically shutdown. The output is switched into an open-circuit condition. The LED key of the associated connector lights-up. The associated output is operational again after a recovery time (during which time it cools-down). To realize this, the associated electronics must be reset; this can be done in 2 ways: * Using the background program of the CPU module, on which the associated binary output function block is configured. For a normal CPU utilization, this reset takes several seconds after cooling-down. Resetting can take somewhat longer for extremely high CPU loading levels. * By depressing the illuminated LED key. Key assignment: - connector X5: Key S1 - connector X6: Key S2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-7 5 Input/output modules 5.2.1 Supplementary components Interface modules with terminals All of the cables for the input / output signals are not directly connected to the module, but via interface modules. The interface modules are used as mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) and also to electrically adapt the plant/system signals and convert them (optional). Interface module Function SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection) of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (module signal level), LED, electrically isolated (floating) SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrically isolated (floating) SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover relay), LED, electrically isolated (floating) SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor) SU11 20 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion SU12 10 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion Table 5-4 Interface modules which can be connected to the module Cables The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plugin cables. A plug-in cable has several cable ends to connect several interface modules: * SC13 to connect 4 interface modules (SBxx, SU12) * SC55 to connect 2 SU11 Depending on the required function (signal conversion, LED display), different interface modules can be connected at the binary inputs and outputs. If interface modules with signal conversion are used, the SC13 cable must be selected: Cable SC55 SC13 cable max. 2 interface modules, type max. 4 interface modules, type SU11 (20 screw terminals, no signal conversion) SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 SU12 Table 5-5 Cable and interface modules which can be connected to EB11, connectors X5, X6 5-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.2.2 Connector- and terminal assignment 5.2.2.1 Terminal assignment for SC55 SU11 terminal assignment at SC55, end A EB11 X5, X6 Significance 1 Binary output 1 1 2 Binary output 2 2 3 Binary output 3 3 4 Binary output 4 4 5 Binary output 5 5 X5A 6 Binary output 6 6 X6A 7 Binary output 7 7 8 Binary output 8 8 9 External 24 V 9 10 External ground 10 11 Binary output 9 11 12 Binary output 10 12 13 Binary output 11 13 14 Binary output 12 14 15 Binary output 13 15 X5B 16 Binary output 14 16 X6B 17 Binary output 15 17 18 Binary output 16 18 19 External 24 V 19 20 External ground 20 SU11 at SC55, cable end A Connector designation when configuring 5 Table 5-6 SU11 terminal assignment for SC55, cable end A Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-9 Input/output modules SU11 terminal assignment at SC55, end B EB11 X5, X6 Significance SU11 at SC55, cable end B 1 Binary input 1 1 2 Binary input 2 2 3 Binary input 3 3 4 Binary input 4 4 X5C 5 Binary input 5 5 X6C 6 Binary input 6 6 7 Binary input 7 7 8 Binary input 8 8 9 External 24 V 9 10 External ground 10 11 Binary input 9 11 12 Binary input 10 12 13 Binary input 11 13 14 Binary input 12 14 15 Binary input 13 15 X5D 16 Binary input 14 16 X6D 17 Binary input 15 17 18 Binary input 16 18 19 External 24 V 19 20 External ground 20 Connector designation when configuring Table 5-7 SU11 terminal assignment for SC55, cable end B 5-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.2.2.2 Terminal assignment for SC13 At the particular cable ends, only certain signal types are available, where only the correct interface modules can be used: Terminal assignment, interface module Interface module Screw terminal (x=1...8) SB10 Significance 1:1 screw terminal x Signal 5x Reference potential (ground or P24) SB60 Binary inputs 115/230 V x1 Ground x2 Binary input 115 V x4 Binary input 230 V SB61 Binary inputs 24/48 V x Binary input 24 V 1x Binary input 48 V 5x Reference SB70 5 Binary outputs (relay) x1 Common (center contact) x2 NC contact x4 NO contact SB71 Binary outputs (transistor) x Signal 5x Ground Table 5-8 Terminal assignment, interface module Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-11 Input/output modules Terminal assignment at SC13, end A EB11 X5,X6 Significance SU12 SB10 1 Binary output 1 1 2 Binary output 2 3 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 1/51 12/11/1 4 1/51 2 2/52 22/21/2 4 2/52 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/3 4 3/53 4 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/4 4 4/54 5 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/5 4 5/55 6 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/6 4 6/56 7 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/7 4 7/57 8 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/8 4 8/58 9 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P 10 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-9 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end A Terminal assignment at SC13, end B EB11 Significance X5,X6 SU12 SB10 1 Binary output 1 1 2 Binary output 2 3 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 1/51 12/11/1 4 1/51 2 2/52 22/21/2 4 2/52 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/3 4 3/53 4 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/4 4 4/54 5 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/5 4 5/55 6 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/6 4 6/56 7 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/7 4 7/57 8 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/8 4 8/58 9 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P 10 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-10 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end B 5-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Terminal assignment at SC13, end C EB11 Significance X5,X6 SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 21 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51 22 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52 23 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53 24 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54 25 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55 26 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56 27 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57 28 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58 29 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P 30 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-11 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, Terminal assignment at SC13, end D SB71 cable end C EB11 Significance X5,X6 SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 31 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51 32 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52 33 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53 34 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54 35 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55 36 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56 37 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57 38 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58 39 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P 40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-12 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, SB70 SB70 SB71 5 cable end D 5.2.3 Application information and noise immunity Other information Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 * operation without fan is possible * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data" 5-13 Input/output modules 5.2.4 Technical data General data Power supply No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.6 kg Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 20 mA (only as reference) +24V +20 V +30 V 0,2 A (from an external power supply) + current drain of the connected SB70, SB71 interface modules + current drain from the binary outputs which are directly connected at the binary outputs of the connected components (when using SB10, SU11, SU12) Binary inputs Binary outputs No. 2 x 16 Input voltage +24 V rated value for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V; or open-circuit binary inputs for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V Input current for an 1 signal 5 mA typ. Delay time 200 s No. 2 x 16 Power supply voltage rated value +24 V DC ripple 3.6 V DC permissible range +20 to +30 V, including ripple briefly +35 V for < 0.5 s Output current for a 1 signal rated value 50 mA permissible range 0.2 mA to 50 mA Short-circuit protection Thermal / electronic Limiting inductive switch-off voltage To the supply +1 V Residual current 20 A for a 0 signal Signal level for 0 signal for 1 signal Delay time 5-14 Max. 3 V Min. supply - 2.5 V 15 s Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.2.5 Connecting diagram EB11 X5 2*8 binary outp. BO SC55 40pin 2*8 binary inp. BI l=2*2m or SC13 l=4*2m X6 L bus 2*8 binary outp. BO 40pin 2*8 binary inp. BI SC55 l=2*2m or SC13 l=4*2m A SU11 B 8 BO 8 BO A (each, 20core) SU11 B 8 BI 8 BI D (each, C 10core) 8 BO SB10 8 BO SB10 8 BI SB10 8 BI SB10 SB70 SB70 SB60 SB60 SB71 or SU12 SB71 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 A SU11 B 8 BO 8 BO A (each, 20core) SU11 B 8 BI 8 BI C D (each, 10core) 8 BO SB10 8 BO SB10 8 BI SB10 8 BI SB10 SB70 SB70 SB60 SB60 SB71 or SU12 SB71 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 5 Fig. 5-2 Connecting cables and interface modules Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-15 Input/output modules 5.3 Expansion module IT41 Order No. Description Inputs and outputs 6DD1606-3AC0 The IT41 expansion module provides incremental encoder inputs and analog and binary inputs and outputs The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module. An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the mounting slot of the CPU module itself). * 4 analog outputs * 4 analog inputs * 16 binary outputs * 16 binary inputs * 4 incremental encoders with monitoring tracks * 1 alarm (interrupt) input for each incremental encoder * 1 alarm (interrupt) reset output for each incremental encoder Block diagram Electrical isolation Changeov. switch Pulse sensing 1/2 Changeov. switch Pulse/sony encoder inputs Changeov. switch Pulse sensing 3/4 Changeov. switch Driver 16 binary inputs T filter 50 mA- driver Latch 16 binary outputs Monitoring inputs, alarm identification, alarm reset D IT41 controller A D A D P5 D A Analog outputs A D Dual port RAM Monitoring inputs and outputs for 4 encoders A M U X + Analog inputs M P15 N15 Local expansion bus Fig. 5-3 Block diagram of IT41 5-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Incremental encoder types Selecting the encoder signal voltage Incremental encoders can be connected to IT41, with: * 2 tracks, displaced through 90, A, B and if required zero pulse * separate pulses for forwards- and reverse pulses, e. g. Sony encoders The selection is configured at the speed actual value function block. Incremental encoders with the following signal voltages can be connected to IT41 * 15V * 5V (also as push-pull signals or RS485 differential signals) 5 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-17 Input/output modules Coding plug NOTE The signal voltage is selected, i. e. the associated receive driver is connected by inserting 2 coding plugs, lying one behind the other, into a certain setting (also refer to the following diagram). If the coding plug is used so that the closed wire jumper is towards the front panel of the IT41, then a 5V encoder has been selected. If the interrupted jumpers point towards the front panel, a 15V encoder has been selected. This is the factory setting. 15V encoders with separate forwards/reverse tracks cannot be used without any further measures. Front panel X6 X100 X101 X200 X201 X300 X301 X400 X401 Configured for 5 V encoders . (e. g. SONY) Configured for 15 V encoders X7 (Component side IT41) Fig. 5-4 Assignment of the coding plug for incremental encoders ! 5-18 WARNING If coding plugs are incorrectly inserted, the inputs could be destroyed when pulses are input! Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.3.1 Supplementary components Interface modules with terminals All of the cables for the input/output signals are not directly connected to the module, but via interface modules. The interface modules serve as mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) as well as electrically adapting and converting the plant signals (optional). Interface module Function SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection) of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (module signal level), LED, electrical isolation (floating) SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrical isolation (floating) SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover relay), LED, electrical isolation (floating) SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor) SU10 25 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion SU12 10 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion 5 Table 5-13 Interface modules which can be connected to the module Cables The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plugin cables. Cables for large connectors have several cable ends to which the appropriate number of matching interface modules can be connected. Interface modules with or without signal conversion (e. g. signal level adaption, electrical isolation) and LED display can be used at connectors with binary inputs and outputs. The cable selection depends on the interface modules used: Connector IT41 Signals Cable Interface module X6 Incremental encoder analog outputs Analog inputs binary inputs/outputs SC49 2x SU10 SC49 or SC54 2x or 5x SU10 X7 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 SU12 Table 5-14 Cables to be used with the various modules Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-19 Input/output modules 5.3.2 Connector assignment X6 Connector X6 (50 pin, sub D) connects signals for * 4 incremental encoders * 4 analog outputs Two SU10 interface modules can be connected via an SC49 plug-in cable ("1:1" connection from the module to terminals): SU10 encoder connections at SC49, end A IT41 X6 Encoder with tracks displaced through 90 1 Track A+ Encoder with forwards/ reverse tracks SU 10 at the cable end A V+ 1 34 Track A- V- 2 18 Encoder Track B+ 1 R+ 3 2 Track B- R- 4 35 Zero pulse+ - 5 19 Zero pulse- - 6 3 Track A+ V+ 7 36 Track A- V- 8 20 Encoder Track B+ 2 R+ 9 4 Track B- R- 10 37 Zero pulse+ - 11 21 Zero pulse- - 12 5 Track A+ V+ 13 38 Track A- V- 14 22 Encoder Track B+ 3 R+ 15 6 Track B- R- 16 39 Zero pulse+ - 17 23 Zero pulse- - 18 7 Track A+ V+ 19 40 Track A- V- 20 24 Encoder Track B+ 4 R+ 21 8 Track B- R- 22 41 Zero pulse+ - 23 25 Zero pulse- - 24 9 Encoder power supply approx. +15 V DC, max. 100 mA 25 Not assigned Connector designation when configuring X6A X6B X6C X6D 26 Table 5-15 Pin assignment IT41, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 at SC49, end A 5-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules SU10 terminal assignment at SC49, end B IT41 X6 Encoder with tracks displaced through 90 42 Encoder ground 1 26 Encoder ground 2 10 Monitoring input, encoder 1 3 43 Monitoring input, encoder 2 4 27 Monitoring input, encoder 3 5 11 Monitoring input, encoder 4 6 Encoder with forwards/ reverse tracks SU 10 at cable end B 44 Alarm input 1 7 28 Alarm input 2 8 12 Alarm input 3 9 45 Alarm input 4 10 29 Alarm output 1 11 13 Alarm output 2 12 46 Alarm output 3 13 30 Alarm output 4 14 14 Alarm ground 15 47 Ground (de-coupled) Analog outputs 16 31 Ground (de-coupled) Analog outputs 17 15 Analog output 1 18 48 Ground 19 32 Analog output 2 20 16 Ground 21 49 Analog output 3 22 33 Ground 23 17 Analog output 4 24 50 Ground 25 Connector designation when configuring 5 X6E X6F X6G X6H Table 5-16 Pin assignment IT41, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 at SC49, end B Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-21 Input/output modules 5.3.3 Connector assignment X7 Connector X7 (50 pin, sub D) connects signals for: * 4 analog inputs * 2*8 binary inputs and 2*8 binary outputs Depending on the required function (signal conversion, LED display) different interface modules can be connected to the binary inputs and outputs. If interface modules with signal conversion are used, the SC54 cable must be used: SC49 cable SC54 cable max. 2 interface modules, type max. 5 interface modules, type SU10 (25 screw terminals, no signal conversion) SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 SU12 Table 5-17 Cables and interface modules which can be connected at IT41, connector X7 5-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.3.3.1 Connector assignment X7 for SC49 SU10 terminal assignment at SC49, end A IT41 X7 Significance SU 10 at SC49, cable end A 1 Binary output 1 1 34 Binary output 2 2 18 Binary output 3 3 2 Binary output 4 4 35 Binary output 5 5 19 Binary output 6 6 3 Binary output 7 7 36 Binary output 8 8 20 External P24 voltage 9 4 External ground 10 37 Binary output 9 11 21 Binary output 10 12 5 Binary output 11 13 38 Binary output 12 14 22 Binary output 13 15 6 Binary output 14 16 39 Binary output 15 17 23 Binary output 16 18 7 External P24 voltage 19 40 External ground 20 24 Binary input 1 21 8 Binary input 2 22 41 Binary input 3 23 25 Binary input 4 24 9 Binary input 5 25 Connector designation when configuring X7A 5 X7B X7C Table 5-18 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-23 Input/output modules SU10 terminal assignment at SC49, end B IT41 X7 Significance SU 10 at SC49, cable end B 42 Binary input 6 1 26 Binary input 7 2 10 Binary input 8 3 43 External P24 voltage 4 27 External ground 5 11 Binary input 9 6 44 Binary input 10 7 28 Binary input 11 8 12 Binary input 12 9 45 Binary input 13 10 29 Binary input 14 11 13 Binary input 15 12 46 Binary input 16 13 30 External P24 voltage 14 14 External ground 15 47 Reference ground for differential analog input 16 31 Reference ground for differential analog input 17 15 Analog input 1+ 18 48 Analog input 1- 19 32 Analog input 2+ 20 16 Analog input 2- 21 49 Analog input 3+ 22 33 Analog input 3- 23 17 Analog input 4+ 24 50 Analog input 4- 25 Connector designation when configuring X7C X7D X7E X7F X7G X7H Table 5-19 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end B 5-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.3.3.2 Connector assignment X7 for SC54 Only specific signal types are available at the cable ends, where only the matching interface modules can be used: Terminal assignment, interface modules Interface module Screw terminal (x=1...8) Significance SB10 1:1 screw terminal connection x Signal 5x Reference potential (ground or P24) SB60 Binary inputs 115/230 V x1 Ground x2 Binary input 115 V x4 Binary input 230 V SB61 Binary inputs 24/48 V x Binary input 24 V 1x Binary input 48 V 5x Reference SB70 5 Binary outputs (relay) x1 Common (center contact) x2 NC contact x4 NO contact SB71 Binary outputs (transistor) x Signal 5x Ground Table 5-20 Terminal assignment, interface modules Terminal assignment at SC54, end A IT41 Significance X7 X7A SU12 SB10 1 Binary output 1 1 34 Binary output 2 18 Binary output 3 2 35 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 1/51 12/11/14 1/51 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55 19 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56 3 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57 36 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58 20 External voltage (24 V) 9 1P 1P 1P 4 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-21 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7,SC54 - end A Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-25 Input/output modules Terminal assignment at SC54, end B IT41 Significance X7 X7B SU12 SB10 37 1 1/51 Binary output 9 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 12/11/14 1/51 21 Binary output 10 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52 5 Binary output 11 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53 38 Binary output 12 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54 22 Binary output 13 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55 6 Binary output 14 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56 39 Binary output 15 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57 23 Binary output 16 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58 7 External voltage (24 V) 9 1P 1P 1P 40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-22 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - end B Terminal assignment at SC54, end C IT41 Significance X7 X7C SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 24 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51 8 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52 41 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53 25 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54 9 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55 42 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56 26 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57 10 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58 43 External voltage (24 V) 9 1P 1P 1P 27 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M SB70 SB71 Table 5-23 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end C Terminal assignment at SC54, end D IT41 Significance X7 X7D SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 11 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51 44 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52 28 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53 12 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54 45 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55 29 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56 13 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57 46 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58 30 External voltage (24 V) 9 1P 1P 1P 14 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M SB70 SB71 Table 5-24 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end D 5-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Terminal assignment at SC54, end E IT41 Significance X7 X7E-X7H SU12 47 Reference ground for differential analog inputs 1 31 Reference ground for differential analog inputs 2 15 Analog input 1+ 3 48 Analog input 1- 4 32 Analog input 2+ 5 16 Analog input 2- 6 49 Analog input 3+ 7 33 Analog input 3- 8 17 Analog input 4+ 9 50 Analog input 4- 10 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 Table 5-25 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end E 5 5.3.4 Mounting Distance pieces For the first ITxx For the second ITxx The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug connector on the module). All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces provided (3 are provided)! The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU modules must be retained using the metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the first expansion board. The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3 screws, washers and spring washers supplied. If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance pieces using the M4 nuts provided (and washers). If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using plastic distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the ITxx modules). The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4 nuts provided (and washers). The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack. 5.3.5 Application information and noise immunity Other information Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 * operation without fan is possible * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data" 5-27 Input/output modules 5.3.6 Technical data General data Power supply No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.6 kg Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA + encoder load (max. 100 mA, electron. limited) -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 175 mA 20 V 30 V 24 V (external) Analog inputs Analog outputs 5-28 Number Typ. current drain 100 mA + binary output currents 4 Type Differential inputs, non-floating Input voltage range -10 V +/- 4 LSB to +10 V +/- 4 LSB (1 LSB = 4.88 mV) Input resistance 470 kOhm Input filter 3 dB transition frequency: 1.5 kHz Resolution 12 bits Absolute accuracy Typ. 11 bits over the complete temperature range Max. conversion time 45 s Number 4 Type Outputs with associated ground terminal, nonfloating Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V Output current +/- 10 mA Resolution 16 bits Monotony 14 bits over the complete temperature range Absolute accuracy Typ. 13 bits over the complete temperature range Short-circuit protection to ground Yes Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Binary inputs Number 16 non-floating Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V Input current for 0 signal for 1 signal Binary outputs 0 mA 3 mA typ. Delay time 50 s Number 16, non-floating Power supply voltage From external nominal value 24 V DC perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s Output current for 1 signal nominal current 50 mA (corresponds to max. value) Short-circuit protection Electronically and thermally Limiting inductive switch-off voltages Power supply voltage + 1 V Residual current 20 A for 0 signal 5 Signal level 15 V incremental encoders for 0 signal Max. 3 V for 1 signal Power supply voltage - 2.5 V Switching delay Max. 15 s Number of encoders Total, max. 4 (including 5 V encoder) Type Differential inputs, electrical isolation (optocoupler) Input voltage range Differential voltage -30 V to +30 V Input voltage (for 15 mA load) for 0 signal for 1 signal Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 -30 V to +4 V +8 V to + 30 V Input current Approx. 15 mA (electronically limited) Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency) Phase difference of the track signals Independent of the pulse frequency, min. 200 ns Input filter Can be configured via software (function block) 5-29 Input/output modules 5 V incremental encoders Number of encoders Total, max. 4 (including 15 V encoder) Type Differential inputs, floating (optocoupler) Input voltage range Differential voltage -6 V to +6 V Input voltage for 0 signal -5 V to 0 V for 1 signal +3 V to +5 V Max. input current 15 mA Caution: Is not limited! Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency) Input circuit, cable termination Alarm inputs steady-state 180 Ohm (series resistor) dynamic 100 Ohm (corresponds to the characteristic impedance of a twisted-pair cable) Input filter Can be configured via software (function block) Number 4 (1 per encoder) Type Not floating Input voltage range 0 V to +5 V Input voltage for 0 signal < 1.4 V for 1 signal > 2.0 V for 0 signal Min. -5 mA, max. -3.6 mA for 1 signal Min. -3 mA, max. 0 mA Input current Alarm reset outputs Sony encoder 5-30 Number 4 (1 per encoder) Type Non-floating Output voltage 15 V via 1 kOhm output resistance Output voltage 5 V (for 10 mA load) A Sony encoder HA 705 LK / MSD-560 can be connected without any signal level adaption. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.3.7 Connecting diagrams IT41 X6 SC49 50pin 4 increm. encoders B (each, 26core) A l=2*2m 4 incremental encoder SU10 4 analog outputs AO 4 AO SU10 CPU interface SC54 LE bus A X7 2*8 binary inp. BI or E SB10 SB70 SB70 SB60 SB60 SB71 or SU12 SB71 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 SC49 8 BO D SB10 50pin 2*8 binary outp. BO C 8 BI SB10 l=5*2m 4 analog inputs AI B 8 BO SB10 4 AI SU12 B (each, 26core) A l=2*2m (each, 10core) 8 BI 8 BO 8 BO 5 BI SU10 3 BI 8 BI 4 AI SU10 5 Fig. 5-5 Connecting cables and interface modules Binary outputs with SB10 + - P24 X3 IT41/IT42 9 SB10 Tr D1 1 1 L D R C D2 51 10 GND X2 . IT4 xS B1 0.dsf Fig. 5-6 Connecting binary outputs with SB10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-31 Input/output modules Binary outputs with SU10 IT41/IT42 SU10 9 9 Tr + - D 1 P24 1 L C D R 10 10 GND X2 . IT4xSU10.dsf Fig. 5-7 Connecting binary outputs with SU10 5-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.4 Expansion module IT42 Order No. Description 6DD1606-4AB0 The IT42 expansion module provides analog and binary inputs and outputs The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module. An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the mounting slot of the CPU module itself). Inputs and outputs * 4 analog outputs * 4 integrating, high-resolution analog inputs (V/fc voltage/frequency conversion) * 4 analog inputs (ADU) * 16 binary outputs * 16 binary inputs Block diagram Electrical isolation UFC Counter 1/2 5 UFC Integrating analog inputs UFC Counter 3/4 UFC External trigger inputs Driver T filter 16 binary inputs Latch 50 mA driver 16 binary outputs 16 bit D IT42 controller A D A D A D Dual port RAM D A Analog outputs A M U X + - ... Analog inputs Address bus Data bus Contr. bus 12 bit P5 M P15 N15 Local expansion bus Fig. 5-8 Block diagram of IT42 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-33 Input/output modules 5.4.1 Supplementary components Interface modules with terminals All of the cables for the input / output signals are not directly connected to the module, but are connected via interface modules. The interface modules serve as mechanical connection element (screw/plug-in terminals) and to electrically adapt the plant/system signals (optional). Interface module Function SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection) of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (signal level on the module), LED, electrical isolation (floating) SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrical isolation (floating) SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover relay), LED, electrical isolation (floating) SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor) SU10 25 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion SU12 10 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion Table 5-26 Interface modules which can be connected to the module Cables The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plugin cables. The plug-in cables for large connectors have several cable ends, to which the appropriate number of matching interface modules can be connected. Either interface modules with or without signal conversion (e. g. signal level conversion, electrical isolation) and LED display can be connected at connectors with binary inputs and outputs. The selected cable depends on the type of interface module: Connector IT42 Signals Cable Interface module X6 Integrating analog inputs SC50 SU10 X7 Analog outputs/inputs SC51 SU10 X8 Binary outputs/inputs; SC49 2x trigger inputs for integrating analog inputs or or SC54 5x SU10 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 SU12 Table 5-27 Cables available for use with the module 5-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.4.2 Connector assignment X6 Connector X6 (15-pin, sub D) connects the signals for * 4 integrating analog inputs An SU10 interface module can be connected via plug-in cable SC50 ("1:1 connection from the module to the terminals: Integrating analog inputs at X6 with SU10 IT42 X6 Significance SU10 1 UFC analog input 1+ 1 9 UFC analog input 1- 2 2 Ground, input 1 3 10 Ground, input 2 4 3 UFC analog input 2+ 5 11 UFC analog input 2- 6 4 UFC analog input 3+ 7 12 UFC analog input 3- 8 5 Ground, input 3 9 13 Ground, input 4 10 6 UFC analog input 4+ 11 14 UFC analog input 4- 12 7 Not connected 13 15 Not connected 14 8 Not connected 15 - Not connected 16 - 26 Connector designation when configuring X6A X6B 5 X6C X6D Table 5-28 Pin assignment IT42, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 5.4.3 Connector assignment X7 Connector X7 (25-pin, sub D) connects the signals for * 4 analog outputs * 4 analog inputs An SU10 interface module can be connected via plug-in cable SC51. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-35 Input/output modules Analog inputs/outputs at X7 with SU10 IT42 X7 Significance SU10 Connector designation when configuring 1 ADU analog input 1+ 1 X7A 14 ADU analog input 1- 2 2 ADU analog input 2+ 3 15 ADU analog input 2- 4 3 ADU analog input 3+ 5 16 ADU analog input 3- 6 4 ADU analog input 4+ 7 17 ADU analog input 4- 8 5 Reference ground for differential ADU analog inputs (due to push-pull) 9 18 Reference ground for differential ADU analog inputs (due to push-pull) 10 6 Analog output 1+ 11 19 Ground, inductively decoupled 12 7 Analog output 2+ 13 20 Ground, inductively decoupled 14 8 Analog output 3+ 15 21 Ground, inductively decoupled 16 9 Analog output 4+ 17 22 Ground, inductively decoupled 18 10 Ground 19 23 Ground 20 11 Not connected 21 12 Not connected 22 13 Not connected 23 24 Not connected 24 25 Not connected 25 - Not connected 26 X7B X7C X7D X7E X7F X7G X7H Table 5-29 Pin assignment IT42, connector X7 and terminal assignment SU10 5-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.4.4 Connector assignment X8 Connector X8 (50 pin, sub D) connects the signals for: * 2*8 binary inputs and 2*8 binary outputs * 4 trigger signals for integrating analog inputs The assignment of the 16 binary inputs and outputs corresponds to those of IT41, connector X7. 5.4.4.1 Connector assignment X8 for SC49 SU10 terminal assignment at SC49, end A IT42 X8 Significance SU10 at SC49, cable end A 1 Binary output 1 1 34 Binary output 2 2 18 Binary output 3 3 2 Binary output 4 4 35 Binary output 5 5 19 Binary output 6 6 3 Binary output 7 7 36 Binary output 8 8 20 External P24 voltage 9 4 External ground 10 37 Binary output 9 11 21 Binary output 10 12 5 Binary output 11 13 38 Binary output 12 14 22 Binary output 13 15 6 Binary output 14 16 39 Binary output 15 17 23 Binary output 16 18 7 External P24 voltage 19 40 External ground 20 24 Binary input 1 21 8 Binary input 2 22 41 Binary input 3 23 25 Binary input 4 24 9 Binary input 5 25 Connector designation when configuring 5 X8A X8B X8C Table 5-30 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-37 Input/output modules SU10 terminal assignment at SC49, end B IT42 X8 Significance SU10 at SC49, cable end B 42 Binary input 6 1 26 Binary input 7 2 10 Binary input 8 3 43 External P24 voltage 4 27 External ground 5 11 Binary input 9 6 44 Binary input 10 7 28 Binary input 11 8 12 Binary input 12 9 45 Binary input 13 10 29 Binary input 14 11 13 Binary input 15 12 46 Binary input 16 13 30 External P24 voltage 14 14 External ground 15 47 Trigger input 1 16 31 Trigger input 2 17 15 Trigger input 3 18 48 Trigger input 4 19 32 Not connected 20 16 Not connected 21 49 Not connected 22 33 Not connected 23 17 External P24 voltage 24 50 External ground 25 Connector designation when configuring X8C X8D Table 5-31 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A 5-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.4.4.2 Connector assignment X8 for SC54 Only certain signal types are available at the particular cable ends where only the matching interface modules can be used: Terminal assignment, interface modules Interface module Screw terminal (x=1...8) Significance SB10 1:1 screw terminal connection x Signal 5x Reference potential (ground or P24) SB60 Binary inputs 115/230 V x1 Ground x2 Binary input 115 V x4 Binary input 230 V SB61 Binary inputs 24/48 V x Binary input 24 V 1x Binary input 48 V 5x Reference SB70 5 Binary outputs (relay) x1 Common (center contact) x2 NC contact x4 NO contact SB71 Binary outputs (transistor) x Signal 5x Ground Table 5-32 Terminal assignment of the interface modules Terminal assignment at SC54, end A IT42 Significance X8 X8A SU12 SB10 1 Binary output 1 1 34 Binary output 2 2 18 Binary output 3 2 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 1/51 12/11/14 1/51 2/52 22/21/24 2/52 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54 35 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55 19 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56 3 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57 36 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58 20 External P24 voltage 9 1P 1P 1P 4 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-33 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end A Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-39 Input/output modules Terminal assignment at SC54, end B IT42 Significance X8 X8B SU12 SB10 37 1 1/51 Binary output 9 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 12/11/14 1/51 21 Binary output 10 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52 5 Binary output 11 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53 38 Binary output 12 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54 22 Binary output 13 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55 6 Binary output 14 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56 39 Binary output 15 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57 23 Binary output 16 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58 7 External P24 voltage 9 1P 1P 1P 40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M Table 5-34 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end B Terminal assignment at SC54, end C IT42 Significance X8 X8C SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 24 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51 8 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52 41 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53 25 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54 9 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55 42 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56 26 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57 10 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58 43 External P24 voltage 9 1P 1P 1P 27 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M SB70 SB71 Table 5-35 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end C Terminal assignment at SC54, end D IT42 Significance X8 X8D SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 11 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51 44 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52 28 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53 12 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54 45 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55 29 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56 13 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57 46 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58 30 External P24 voltage 9 1P 1P 1P 14 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M SB70 SB71 Table 5-36 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end D 5-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Terminal assignment at SC54, end E IT42 Significance X8 X8E-X8H SU12 47 Trigger input 1 1 31 Trigger input 2 2 15 Trigger input 3 3 48 Trigger input 4 4 32 Not connected 5 16 Not connected 6 49 Not connected 7 33 Not connected 8 17 External P24 voltage 9 50 External ground 10 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 Table 5-37 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end E 5.4.5 Mounting Distance pieces For the first ITxx For the second ITxx The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug connector on the module). All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces provided (3 are provided)! The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU module, must be retained using the metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the first expansion board. The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3 screws, washers and spring washers supplied. If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance pieces using the M4 nuts provided (and washers). If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using plastic distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the ITxx modules). The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4 nuts provided (and washers). The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack. 5.4.6 Application information and noise immunity Other information Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 * operation without fan is possible * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data" 5-41 5 Input/output modules 5.4.7 Technical data General data Power supply No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.5 kg Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 140 mA 20 V 30 V 24 V (external) Integrating analog inputs Typ. current drain 420 mA 100 mA + binary output currents No. 4 Integrating analog inputs Differential inputs, floating, V/f conversion Integration time * sampling time of the AFC function block or * the time between 2 positive edges of the external trigger signal Input voltage range -10 V to +10 V Input resistance 470 kOhm Input filter -3 dB transition frequency : 2 kHz Resolution Up to 17 bits, depending on the integration time: 13 bits at 1 ms integration time 15 bits at 4 ms integration time 17 bits at 20 ms integration time Sampling analog inputs 5-42 Relative accuracy Typ. 14 bits No. 4 Type Differential inputs, non-floating Input voltage range -10 V to +10 V Input resistance 470 kOhm Input filter -3 dB transition frequency : 1.5 kHz Resolution 12 bits Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature range Max. conversion time 45 s. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Analog outputs Binary inputs No. 4 Type Output with associated ground, non-floating Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V Output current +/- 10 mA Resolution 16 bits Monotony 14 bits over the complete temperature range Absolute accuracy Typ. 13 bits over the complete temperature range Short-circuit protection to ground Yes No. 16 non-floating Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V Input current Binary outputs for 0 signal 0 mA for 1 signal 3 mA typ. Delay time for +24 V input signal 50 s No. 16, non-floating Power supply voltage From external it nominal value 24 V DC perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s 5 Output current for an 1 signal nominal current 50 mA (also corresponds to the max. value) Short-circuit protection Electronically and thermally Limiting inductive switch-off voltages Supply voltage + 1 V Residual current 20 A for 0 signal Signal level for 0 signal for 1 signal Switching delay Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Max. 3 V Supply voltage - 2.5 V Max. 15 s 5-43 Input/output modules 5.4.8 Connecting diagram IT42 X6 15pin 4 analog inp. AI (integrating, V/f) SC50 l=2m SU10 4 AI, integrating X7 4 analog outp. AO 25pin 4 analog inputs AI SC51 l=2m CPU interface SU10 4 AO 4 AI SC54 LE bus X8 A B C 8 BO 8 BO 8 BI SB10 SB10 SB10 8 BI SB10 2*8 binary outp. BO 50pin SB70 SB70 SB60 SB60 2*8 binary inp. BI SB71 or SU12 SB71 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 SB61 or SU12 4 trigger signals for integrating AI l=5*2m or SC49 l=2*2m A 8 BO SU10 8 BO 5 BI E (each, 10core) D SU12 4 trigger integrating AI B (each, 26core) 3 BI SU10 8 BI 4 trigger integrating AI Fig. 5-9 Connecting cables and interface modules 5-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.5 Converter control ITDC Order No. Description Inputs and outputs 6DD1601-0AH0 The ITDC expansion module corresponds to the earlier PG16 module, and provides the gating (control) for * line-commutated drive converters. It includes: * Auto-reversing stage * Current controller * Gating unit (for max. 400 Hz output frequency) * For 6-pulse drive converters It is especially suitable for connection to SITOR power sections. The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module. One ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the slot in the CPU module). Presently, the operation of 2 ITDC modules in one processor module is not supported. * 1 SITOR interface * 2 analog outputs * 4 binary outputs * 4 binary inputs * 1 incremental encoder input: With zero pulse Optionally, for differential signals For tracks, shifted through 90 degrees (A, B) For 15 V (HTL)- or 5 V encoders Max. 1 MHz pulse frequency * Incremental encoder setting No electrical isolation of the inputs-/outputs Incremental encoders can be connected to the ITDC, with the following signal voltages * 15V * 5V (also as push - pull signals and RS485 differential signals) The incremental encoder type is selected using DIL switch S1 on the component side of the ITDC (refer to the following diagram ). There is the following assignment of the DIL switch settings S1.X to the pulse encoder channels : Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Switch Switch setting Function S1.1 ON Track A, zero volt switching threshold f. 5V encoders S1.1 OFF Track A, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders S1.2 ON Track B, zero volt switching threshold f. 5V encoders S1.2 OFF Track B, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders S1.3 ON Zero pulse, 0V switching threshold f. 5V encoders S1.3 OFF Zero pulse, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders S1.4 any none 5-45 5 Input/output modules Corresponding to the setting of the switch on S1, either select the 15V 3-phase encoder (7V switching threshold) or 5V 3-phase encoder (0V switching threshold). For the factory setting, the switch is in the OFF position for 15V 3-phase encoders. H10 H11 ON S1 X5 1 2 3 4 OFF Switch position for 15V 3-phase encoders (OFF switch setting) X6 X7 (Component side ITDC) Fig. 5-10 Switch position for incremental encoders 5-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules Block diagram ASIC U1 Line counter Vsyn2 Line counter Vsyn3 ASIC U1 Line counter L12 Line counter Usyn Line angular encoder Line counter L13 Pulse generator ASIC U1 Actual values Sitor interface Main pulse length Second pulse length ASIC U1 Curr. act. val. sens. Zero current sens. Volt. act. val. sens. Watchdog Pulse end stage 5 ASIC U1 Pulse sensing ITDC controller and gating unit Changeov. switch 5V/15V Latch 50 mA driver Speed input 5V/15V 4 binary outputs Data bus A Control bus Address bus D 2 analog outputs D A Control bus Data bus Address bus Driver P5 M P15 T filter 4 binary intputs N15 Local expansion bus Fig. 5-11 Block diagramm ITDC Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-47 Input/output modules 5.5.1 Supplementary components Interface modules with terminals All of the input / output signal cables are not directly connected to the module, but are connected through interface modules. The interface modules serve as mechanical connecting elements (screw plug-in terminals), and to electrically adapt the plant /system signals and convert them (optional). Interfacemodule Function SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection) from 8 binary inputs /outputs, LED, no signal conversion SB60 8 binary inputs, 230V to 24V conversion (signal level of the module), LED, electrical isolation SB61 8 binary inputs, 48V to 24V conversion, LED, electrical isolation SB70 8 binary outputs, 24V to 230V conversion (changeover relay), LED, electrical isolation SB71 8 binary outputs, 25V to 48V conversion (transistor) SU11 20 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion Table 5-38 Interface modules which can be connected to the module Cables The module is connected to the interface modules using plug-in cables. Preassembled cables are available for the SU11 interface module. Interface modules either with or without signal conversion (e.g. signal level conversion, electrical isolation) and LED display can be used at connector X5 with binary inputs and outputs. Pre-assembled cables are not available for the SB10, SB60, SB61, SB70 and SB71 interface modules in conjunction with the ITDC. Conn., ITDC Signals Cable Interface module X5 Analog outputs SITOR start-up signals Binary inputs /outputs and speed sensing SC12 1x SU11 SC12 - 1x or SU11 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71 SU12 X6 Table 5-39 Cables which can be used together with the modules 5-48 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.5.2 Connector assignment X5 Connector X5 (20-pin plug connector) connects signals for * 2 analog outputs * SITOR start-up signals The SU11 interface module can be connected via SC12 plug-in cable (1:1connection from the module to the terminals): SU11 analog outputs and startup signals via the SC12 cable ITDC X5 Pin Designation SU 11 X2 Connector designation for configuring 1 Analog output 1+ 1 X5A 2 Ground, analog output 1 2 3 Analog output 2+ 3 4 Ground, analog output 2 4 5 External synchronizing voltage, L1 for 3phase synchronization 5 6 Reference voltage for the synchronizing voltage 6 7 P15 output, 15V 7 X5B 5 (Ri =600 ohm, not suitable to supply the encoders) 8 Measuring signal "Zero crossover of the SITOR power supply phase voltage" L13 8 9 Display, zero crossover signal identification, synchronizing voltage 9 Logic signal level 15V, Ri=2.2K ohm for an "H" signal 10 External pulse inhibit, if connected to pin 7 or 24V -> pulses enabled 10 11 Excitation current setpoint, 0..10V, Ri=2.2K ohm 11 12 Measuring signal "Summed pulses" 12 13 Analog current actual value +/-10V, Ri=2.2K ohm 13 14 Ground (digital), reference potential for measuring signals 14 15 Measuring signal, "Total pulse inhibit", pulses enabled = 5V 15 16 Ground, synchronizing module 16 17 Synchronizing voltage U12 for 3-phase synchronization 17 18 Synchronizing voltage U23 for 3-phase synchronization 18 19 Synchronizing voltage U31 for 3-phase synchronization 19 20 Pulse chain synchronizing, connected with additional PG11/PG16 or ITDC 20 "H" output voltage: 10-14V "H" output current: 40mA Table 5-40 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X5 and terminal assignment SU11, Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-49 Input/output modules 5.5.3 Connector assignment X6 Connector X6 (20-pin plug connector) connects the signals for: * 4 binary inputs * 4 binary outputs * 1 speed input The SU11 interface module can be connected via the SC12 plug-in cable (1:1 connection from the module to the terminals): SU11 binary input/output and speed sensing via cable SC12 ITDC X6 Pin Designation SU 11 X2 Connector designation for configuring 1 Binary input 1 Binary input 2 1 2 X6A 2 3 Binary input 3 3 4 Binary input 4 4 5 Binary output 1 5 6 Binary output 2 6 7 Binary output 3 7 8 Binary output 4 8 9 Pext, positive power supply, max. 30 V 9 10 Mext, 0V power supply 10 11 Speed sensing, track 1A- 11 12 Speed sensing, track 1A+ 12 13 Speed sensing, track 1B- 13 14 Speed sensing, track 1B+ 14 15 Speed sensing, zero pulse 1N- 15 16 Speed sensing, zero pulse 1N+ 16 17 Coarse pulse 17 18 GND ext. 18 19 GND ext. 19 20 n. c. 20 X6G X6C Table 5-41 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU11 5.5.4 Connector assignment X7 Connector X7 (sub-D 50-pin) connects the signals to control (gate) a SITOR set (three-phase bridge). Via plug-in cable: * SC17.2 (screened round cable, 50-pin SUB-D, 2m long), or * SC31.2 (screened round cable, 50-pin SUB-D, 10m long) The module can be directly connected to a SITOR set. 5-50 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules SITOR signals Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 ITDC X7 Pin Designation 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Fuse monitoring (fault = "L") 4 Screen 5 Zero crossover (L1-L3) 6 Screen 7 +/- Iact frequency: 60KHz +/- 30KHz corresponds to +/- 2 IN 8 Reference voltage, excitation current setpoint 9 M24 external 10 Pulse. 1.6 11 M24 external 12 Pulse 1.3 13 Screen 14 M24 external 15 Pulse 2.4 16 M24 external 17 Pulse 2.1 18 VSYN (synchronizing voltage) neutral point 19 Excitation current monitoring (fault = "H") IE_act < 3,3 %, IE_N = "H") 20 Temperature monitoring (fault = "L") 21 Screen 22 +/- VAIst frequency 60KHz +/- 30KHz corresponds to +/- VAN 23 Screen 24 +/- Iact analog +/-10V corresponds to +/- IN (only when connecting a SITOR set, for SE20.1--> 2P24) 25 Screen 26 M24 external 27 Pulse 1.4 28 M24 external 29 Pulse 1.1 30 Pulse 2.2 31 M24 external 32 Pulse 2.5 33 M24 external 34 VSYN (L1) 35 Undervoltage monitoring (fault = "L") 36 Screen 37 Zero crossover (L1-L2) Connector designation for configuring X7G 5 X7G 5-51 Input/output modules ITDC X7 Pin Designation 38 Screen 39 I = 0 signal (I = 0 corresponds to "H") 40 Screen 41 Excitation current setpoint IE_N_S (Feldsteller) corresponds to 10 V 42 Pulse 1.2 43 M24 external 44 Pulse 1.5 45 M24 external 46 M24 external 47 Pulse 2.6 48 M24 external 49 Pulse 2.3 50 Screen Connector designation for configuring Table 5-42 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X7 SITOR signals 5-52 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules 5.5.5 Technical data General data Insulation group A according to VDE 0110 13 Group 2 for 24 V DC, 15 V DC, 5 V DC 0 to +55 degrees C and fan operation (force ventil.) -25 to +70 degrees C F according to DIN 40050 S according to DIN 40040 Installed in stationary equipment, which is not necessarily vibration-free ES 902 C 233.4 mm * 220 mm 20.14 mm 1 slot 600 g Ambient temperature Storage temperature Humidity rating Altitude rating Mechanical rating Packaging system Dimensions Module width Installation size Weight Power supply Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 100 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 490 mA (+ encoder load) -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 75 mA +15V +30 V 70 mA (+ load of the binary outputs) 24 V (external) Analog outputs, connector X5 No. Version Output voltage range Output current Resolution Monotony Absolute accuracy Short-circuit protection to ground Binary inputs connector X6 Typ. current drain 5 2 Output with associated ground, non-floating -10 V to +10 V +/- 10 mA 12 bits 10 bits over the complete temperature range Typ. 9 bits over the complete temperature range Yes No. 4 non-floating Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage For 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or inputs open-circuit For 1 signal +13 V to +33 V Input current Delay time Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 For 0 signal 0 mA For 1 signal 3 mA typ. 120 s 5-53 Input/output modules Binary outputs connector X6 Incremental encoders No. Supply voltage Nominal value Permiss. range Briefly Output current for 1 signal Rated current Permiss. range Short-circuit protection Limiting inductive switch-off voltages Total load Residual current Signal level For 0 signal For 1 signal Switching delay 4, non-floating Must be supplied externally 24 V DC +20 V to 30 V, including ripple +35 V, max. 0.5 s No. of encoders Version 1, non-floating Differential inputs without electrical isolation, can be changed over between 5V/15V(HTL) Tracks A and B (phase shifted through 90 degrees), if required with zero pulse N Max. 1 MHz (track frequency) Independent of the pulse frequency, min 200 ns Track signals Pulse frequency Phase difference of the track signals Input voltage for 15V (HTL) For 0 signal For 1 signal Input voltage for 5V For 0 signal For 1 signal Permissible input voltage range Input resistance Fault pulse suppression 50 mA To 50 mA Electronic (thermal) + 1 V power supply voltage 80 % at 50 degrees C, all outputs 50 mA 20 A for a 0 signal Max. 3 V - 2.5 V power supply voltage 1->0: max. 10 s 0->1: max. 100 s -30 V to +5 V +8 V to + 30 V -7 V to -1.5 V +1.5 V to + 7 V Differential voltage, -30 V to +30 V Approx. 40K Can be configured at the speed actual value function block: 0 - 16 s (62.5 kHz) The module does not provide a power supply for the encoder. 5.5.6 Mounting/Installation Spacers For the first ITxx 5-54 When mounted outside the subrack, the ITxx module is inserted on a CPU module PMx or on an ITxx module, already mounted on PMx (using a 96-pin plug connector on the module). All of the modules must be screwed to one another using the spacers provided (3 spacers)! The first ITxx, mounted directly on a CPU module, must be retained using the metal spacers (these are included with the PMx). The electrical contact which is established is required to identify the first expansion module. The metal spacers are attached to the PMX using the M3 screws provided together with the washers and spring washers. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Input/output modules For a second ITxx If only one ITxx module is used, it can be screwed to the metal spacers using the M4 nuts (and washers) provided. If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx module is not screwed using the nuts, but instead, using plastic spacers (these are included with the ITxx modules). The second ITxx module can then be inserted on the plastic spacers, and screwed together using the M4 nuts (and washers). After the module assembly has been screwed together, it is inserted into the subrack. 5.5.7 Application information and noise immunity Other information * Operation without fans is possible * Noise immune operation is only possible, if it is tightly screwed into the subrack. For more detailed information on EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to the "General technical data" section! 5.5.8 Connecting diagrams 5 ITDC X5 20pin SITORdiagnostics sig. 2 anal. outputs SC12 (20pin) l=2m 2 AA SU11 X6 4 dig. outputs DO 20pin 4 dig. inputs DI 1 incremental encoder input SC12 (20pin) l=2m SU11 SC17.2 (l=2m) X7 LE bus 4 BA 4 BE 1 INC or 50pin SC31.2 (l=2m) SITOR interface (each, 50pin) SITOR interface SE20.2 or SITOR set Fig. 5-12 Connecting cables and interface modules Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 5-55 Input/output modules 5-56 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6 Communications support modules Overview Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6.1 Communications support modules CS 6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11 6-12 6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 6-15 6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL 6-21 6.5 Interface module SS1 6-23 6.6 Interface module SS2 6-27 6.7 Interface module SS31 6-29 6.8 Communications module SS4 6-31 6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52 6-41 6-2 6-1 6 Communications support modules 6.1 Communications support modules CS 6.1.1 Communications support module CS7 Order No. 6DD1662-0AB0 Description The CS7 module is a support module for the following communication modules: * SS4 * SS5 * SS52 Serial data transfer protocols (DUST, USS, PROFIBUS) can be implemented using the CS7 and the communication modules. There is a dual port RAM on the CS7, via which the communication modules can transfer data with the CPU modules. Features * 3 plug-in recptacle for communication modules (X01 to X03) * Dual port RAM with 16 Kbytes per communications module * 2 diagnostic LEDs per plug-in compartment (H10/H11, H20/H21 , H30/H31) to display the status of the communications module; the significance of the LED depends on the particular communications module. * Transfers the L-bus basic sampling time (for synchronization) on the communications module; this function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules. * Transfers the clock interrupt from the communications module to the CS7 to set the real-time clock of a CPU module; this function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules. * An interrupt signal on the L bus can be generated from the communications module. However, it must be ensured that only one interface module executes this function (configured). This function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules,. * Test socket pair for each plug-in receptacle (X10/X11, X20/X21, X30/X31) to initiate a reset; only for test purposes! not for operation! * L-bus connection 6-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules Interface to the communications module The connection between the CS7 support module and the communications modules is established via the 48-pin socket connectors of the 3 plug-in receptacle X01, X02 and X03: Pin Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 A B C 1 P5 P5 L_LOCK 2 AB1 AB2 AB3 3 AB4 AB5 AB6 4 AB7 AB8 AB9 5 AB10 AB11 AB12 6 L_RESET CTCLK AB13 7 DB0 DB1 DB2 8 DB3 DB4 DB5 9 DB6 DB7 DB8 10 DB9 DB10 DB11 11 DB12 DB13 DB14 12 DB15 L_DEN L_CSMSB 13 L_INTDPR DT_L_R L_CSLSB 14 L_RDYDPR L_LED1 L_LED2 15 P15 N15 L_INTUHR 16 M5 M5 M5 6 6-3 Communications support modules 6.1.1.1 Application information and noise immunity * operation without fan is possible * the front panels of the inserted communication modules must be connected to the CS7 front panel using the screen cable supplied! * slot covers must be provided at empty receptacle. * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Other information 6-4 Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 SIEMENS SIEMENS SS4 H31 X31 6DD1688-0AD0 H30 6DD1662-0AB0 X30 X5 CS7 SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AE0 SS5 H20 H21 X20 X21 X5 SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AE0 H10 H11 X10 X11 SS5 X5 Communications support modules 6 Fig. 6-1 CS7 front panel 6-5 Communications support modules 6.1.1.2 Technical data General data Power supply 6-6 No. of slots occupied 2 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 40.28 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.5 kg Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V Typ. current drain 0.5 A + current drain of the interface modules +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V Current drain of the interface modules -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Current drain of the interface modules Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.1.1.3 Connecting diagram CS7 SC57 SS4 26 pin 26pin DUST/USS or Cable 2 l=0.5m Cable 1 Partial connector set or SS5 9pin PROFIBUS FMS D-Sub L bus l=5m 9 pin SM8 D-Sub, high density Operator control unit (PC) SM5 Partial connector set . COM1/2 9 pin Connector assignment SS4 RS 485 (USS-Bus) RS 232 +RS485P =5 TxD=4 RxD=17 -RS485N =17 Grd=9 Grd=9 Connector assignment SS5 RS 232 (Monitor) RS 485 (PROFIBUS) TxD=7 +Tx/Rx-Sig. =3 RxD=2 -Tx/Rx-Sig. =8 Grd=5 Grd=5 or SS52 9pin PROFIBUS DP D-Sub SM5 Partial connector set Connector assignment SS52 RS 232 (Monitor) RS 485 (PROFIBUS) +Tx/Rx-Sig. =3 TxD=7 -Tx/Rx-Sig. =8 RxD=2 Grd=5 Grd=5 Fig. 6-2 Connecting communication modules and cables 6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-7 Communications support modules 6.1.2 Communications support module CS8 Order No. 6DD1662-0AC0 Description The CS8 module is a support module for the following communication modules: * CBP1, CBP2 * CBC, CBD, CBI, CBL Serial data transfer protocols (CAN, DEVICE-NET, PROFIBUS) can be implemented using CS8 and the communication modules. Features * 2 slots (X01, X02) to accept 2 communication modules (COMBOARDs). * The special covers supplied must be mounted onto the COMBOARDs, so that they are electrically connected and grounded, for EMC-, dust protection- and safety reasons. * L-bus connection Interface to the communications module 6-8 The connection between the CS8 support module and the communication modules is established via the 64-pin plug connectors of the 2 slots X01 and X02: PinNo. Signalname PinNo. Signalname PinNo. Signalname PinNo. Signal name A1 N15 A9 D10 A17 M A25 L_BUSY B1 N15 B9 D11 B17 P5 B25 L_INT_CU_DPR A2 M A10 D12 A18 A8 A26 L_INT_DPR_CU B2 M B10 D13 B18 A9 B26 TEMPERATURE A3 D0 A11 D14 A19 A10 A27 L_DSAVE B3 D1 B11 D15 B19 A11 B27 ATACHO_DPR A4 D2 A12 M A20 A12 A28 BTACHO_DPR B4 D3 B12 SYNC_DNE B20 Excitation B28 P15_OK A5 D4 A13 NR_TACHO A21 M A29 P24_AUX B5 D5 B13 A1 B21 P5 B29 M24_AUX A6 D6 A14 A2 A22 L_RD A30 P15 B6 D7 B14 A3 B22 L_WR B30 P15 A7 M A15 A4 A23 L_CS A31 M B7 P5 B15 A5 B23 SYNC_TAC B31 M A8 D8 A16 A6 A24 M A32 SINE B8 D9 B16 A7 B24 L_RESET B32 COSINE Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.1.2.1 Application information and noise immunity * Operation without fans possible * The communication modules are screwed to the PC board of CS8! The cut-outs of the covers supplied, must be adapted to the connector dimensions of the communication modules. * The cover is mounted between the CS8 and the communications module. * Free slots must be covered with complete covers. * Noise-immune operation is only possible if they are screwed into the subrack Other information For additional information on EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data"! 6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-9 Communications support modules Cover Front panel Captive nut for mounting to the front panel X01 3 (Hole for mounting panel to the PC board over endpiece) 2 (Hole for mounting to the cover) 4 (Slot designation) 1 (Cutout for COMBOARD) A B C Captive nut for mounting to the front panel SIEMENS 6DD1662-0AC0 CS8 2 (Hole for mounting to the cover) 4 (Module designation, MLFB, product version) 2 (Hole for mounting to the cover) 1 (Cutout for COMBOARD) X02 2 (Hole for mounting to the cover) Captive nut for mounting to the front panel 4 (Slot designation) 3 (Hole for mounting panel to the PC board over endpiece) Fig. 6-3 CS8 front panel and cover 6-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.1.2.2 Technical data General data Power supply Slot assignment 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 18.3 x 233.4 x 220 Weight approx. 0.3 kg Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 0.5 A + current drain of the interface modules +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V Current drain of the interface modules -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Current drain of the interface modules 6.1.2.3 Connection diagram X01 CS8 LBus 6 Communikations module CB.. X02 Communikations module CB.. Fig. 6-4 Possibilities of connecting communication modules Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-11 Communications support modules 6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11 Order No. 6DD1661-0AB1 Description A connection to the industrial SINEC H1 communications network (Industrial Ethernet") is established using the CSH11 module. The module includes the CP1470 module (CP: Communications Processor) and a dual port RAM to transfer data to the CPU modules. Features * serial interface to parameterize the CP1470 (X5) * serial interface to connect to SINEC H1 (X6) * diagnostics LED * function selector switch and reset button * transferring clock interrupts from the CP1470 onto the C bus * L- and C bus connection Connection to SINEC H1 The 15-pin connector X6 is connected to SINEC H1 bus coupler via the SINEC H1 drop cable 727-1. The drop cable must be latched into place using the latch mechanism. The maximum cable length of the bus coupling cable may not exceed 50 m. Ordering data A description of the SINEC H1 drop cable and additional bus components and their Order Nos. are provided in Catalog "SINEC Industrial Communication Networks, IK 10". Parameterization There is an asynchronous serial interface to parameterize the CP1470 (e. g. setting the Ethernet address) and administration using the configuring software SINEC NML from a PC, at the 25 pin connector X5. SINEC NML must also be ordered: Order No.: 6GK 1740-0AB01-0EA0 To connect PG7xx programmers or AT-compatible PCs, it also has * a passive 20 mA line current interface (TTY) as well as * RS 232 (V.24) interface with a 9.6 kbaud baud rate. Switch 6-12 A switch with the ADM/RUN/STP settings and a reset button are provided on the front panel. Switch position Function ADM Resetting the CP1470 via reset button RUN Communications is established STP Communications is interrupted Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules Reset button LED The CP1470 can be reset using the reset button. The switch must first be set to "ADM". Green Red Significance Dark Dark No power supply; Lit Dark Database and synchronization O.K. Flashi ng Dark Database inconsistent; correct NML configuring Dark Lit No synchronization with the initializing CPU module; possible cause: @CSH11 function block not configured, incorrect slot or incompatible firmware Dark Flashin Hardware fault g Flashi ng Lit temporary initialization status Switch in the STOP setting or ADM The function of the LEDs is also described in the User Instructions Configuring the communications". 6.2.1 Application information and noise immunity * the module may only be used in forced-ventilated subracks. 6 * the serial connecting cables must be latched-in using the latching mechanisms provided. * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data". 6.2.2 Connector assignment of the interfaces Parameterizing interface X5 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 25-pin sub D socket connector Pin RS-232 TTY 1 Screen ---- 2 TxD ---- 3 RxD ---- 7 Ground ---- 9 ---- +RxD 10 ---- -RxD 18 ---- +TxD 21 ---- -TxD 6-13 Communications support modules SINEC H1 interface X6 15-pin sub D socket connector Pin Signal name Code 1 Collision ( screen ) CI-S 2 Collision ( + ) CI-A 3 Transmit data ( + ) DO-A 4 Receive data ( screen ) DI-S 5 Receive data ( + ) DI-A 6 Power supply ( - ) VC 7 Control signal ( + ) CO-A 8 Control signal ( screen ) CO-S 9 Collision ( - ) CI-B 10 Transmit data ( - ) DO-B 11 Transmit data ( screen ) DO-S 12 Receive data ( - ) DI-B 13 Power supply ( + ) VP 14 Power supply ( screen ) VS 15 Control signal ( - ) CO-B Housing Overall screen PG 6.2.3 Technical data General data Power supply No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.5 kg Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 2,5 A +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 100 mA without connecting to a SINEC H1 bus coupler 600 mA with connecting to a SINEC H1 bus coupler -15 V 6-14 -15.6 V -14.4 V Max. 100 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 Order No. Description CS12: CS13: CS14: 6DD1660-0BC0 6DD1660-0BB0 6DD1660-0BA0 CS22: 6DD1660-0BD0 An extremely fast coupling can be established between as many subracks as required via fiber-optic cable using the CS12 modules (or CS13, CS14) and CS22. A fiber-optic coupling consists of a master module, to which 1 to max. 8 slave modules can be connected. All of the master- and slave modules are accommodated in a dedicated subrack. The coupling practically represents an extension of the backplane bus, whereby data transfer is realized via the RAM memory on the CS12. All of the connected CS22 slave modules can access this; they all have the same priority. CS13 and CS14 consist of a CS12- and one or two ICS1 modules, which have fiber-optic cable connections for up to 4 or 8 slaves. Features * max. fiber-optic cable length of a point-to-point connection: 200 m * data transfer time: approx. 5 s each 16-bit value for a L/C bus under normal load conditions max. approx. 32 s per 16-bit value for an L/C bus under extremely high load conditions * 128 kbyte RAM memory on CS12 * a master module can transfer the following signals to the slave: - basic sampling time (to synchronize the slave) - alarm interrupt (to call an interrupt task) - clock interrupt (to set the real-time clock) * L- and C bus connections; * not intended for use in the SR6(V), as data transfer is only realized via the C bus Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-15 6 Communications support modules 6.3.1 Slave connection Depending on the master module type, 1 to 8 slaves (CS22) can be connected: Master module No. of slots No. of slaves (CS22) CS12 1 1 CS13 2 1 to 4 3 1 to 8 (consists of CS12 + ICS1) CS14 (consists of CS12 + ICS1 + ICS1) The following diagrams and tables illustrate the fiber-optic cable connections to be connected for the possible master-slave configurations. The interfaces are defined (fiber-optic cable connections) by appropriately configuring in HWConfig. For CS13 and CS14, the two fiber-optic cable connections on the basic CS12 module are not used Connecting 1 slave Master module Slave module CS12 CS22 CS12 6-16 Type 1 X5 Trans. X6 X6 Rec. X5 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules Connecting 4 slaves CS22 (1) CS22 (2) X6 X5 X6 X5 X8 X7 CS22 (4) X6 X5 X12 X11 X10 X9 X6 X5 CS22 (3) X6 X5 X6 X5 Basic module ICS1 CS13 Master module Slave module CS13 CS22 CS12 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 ICS1 Type X5 Not X6 used 1 2 3 4 X5 Trans. X6 X6 Rec. X5 X7 Trans. X6 X8 Rec. X5 X9 Trans. X6 X10 Rec. X5 X11 Trans. X6 X12 Rec. X5 6 6-17 Communications support modules CS22 (1) Connecting 8 slaves CS12 ICS1 ICS1 (1) (2) CS22 (2) CS22 (7) CS22 (8) CS14 Master module Slave module CS14 CS22 CS12 Cascading capability 6-18 ICS1 ICS1 Type X5 Not X6 used 1 2 3 4 X5 Trans. X6 X6 Rec. X5 X7 Trans. X6 X8 Rec. X5 X9 Trans. X6 X10 Rec. X5 X11 Trans. X6 X12 Rec. X5 5 X5 Trans. X6 X6 Rec. X5 6 7 8 X7 Trans. X6 X8 Rec. X5 X9 Trans. X6 X10 Rec. X5 X11 Trans. X6 X12 Rec. X5 In a subrack, several master modules as well as master- and slave modules can be used together. Thus, branched or extremely large networks can be created. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.3.2 Supplementary components Fiber-optic cable Order designation The following fiber-optic cable is used for the coupling: SINEC FIBER OPTIC CABLE standard cable, assembled in pairs with 4 BFOC connectors A detailed description of the fiber-optic cable is described in Catalog "SINEC Industrial Communication Networks, IK 10". 6XV1 820-5B Multiplier Length code 0,1 m 1m 10 m 100 m H N T U 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 Table 6-1 Fiber-optic cable Order No. and length code 6.3.3 Application information and noise immunity * The CS1x, CS22 modules may only be used in a force-ventilated subrack. * The modules can only be used in SR12.x and SR24.x subracks (C bus required). * Before the power supply voltage of a subrack is switched-on (poweredup), all of the plug connections of the fiber-optic cables involved must be inserted. In operation, the plug connectors of the fiber-optic cable coupling may not be released. * Master- and slave subracks can be powered-down while in operation and powered-up again. The coupling is then re-established. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-19 Communications support modules * If a fiber-optic cable is not inserted, the transmit- and receive connections must be protected using the appropriate caps * As CS13, CS14 of the ICS1 partial modules do not have a connector at the L/C bus, when required, Daisy Chain jumpers must be inserted (if there is still a CPU module to the right)! * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data" 6.3.4 Technical data General data No. of slots occupied Dimensions W x H x D [mm] Weight [kg] Power supply voltage Rated voltage +5 V +15 V 6-20 min. max. +4.75 V +5.25 V +14.4 V +15.6 V CS12: 1 CS13: 2 CS14: 3 CS22: 1 CS12: 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 CS13: 40.28 x 233.4 x 220 CS14: 60.42 x 233.4 x 220 CS22: 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 CS12: 0.5 CS13: 0.8 CS14: 1.1 CS22: 0.4 Typ. current drain CS12: 1.8 A CS13: 4.0 A CS14: 5.5 A CS22: 1.5 A CS12: 50 mA CS13: 100 mA CS14: 150 mA CS22: 150 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL Order No. 6DD1663-0AB0 Description Using the ITSL expansion module, a connection is established to an extremely fast, synchronous SIMOLINK fiber-optic cable bus The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A maximum of 2 ITxx expansion modules can be inserted on a CPU module. An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the CPU module slot). Inputs and outputs * 2 plug connectors for an incoming and outgoing fiber-optic cable 6.4.1 Supplementary components Fiber-optic cable 6.4.2 Mounting The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug connector on the module). 6 Distance pieces All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces provided (3 are provided)! For the first ITxx The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU module must be retained using the metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the first expansion board. The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3 screws, washers and spring washers supplied. If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance elements using the M4 nuts provided (and washers). For the second ITxx If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using plastic distance pieces (this is included in the scope of supply of the ITxx modules). The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4 nuts provided (and washers). The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack. 6.4.3 Application information and noise immunity * operation without fan is possible * noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed into the subrack Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-21 Communications support modules Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" 6.4.4 Technical data General data Power supply 6-22 No. of slots 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight Approx. 0.6 kg Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 175 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.5 Interface module SS1 Order No. 6DD1688-1AA0 Description The SS4 communications module with SS1 interface module can be equipped with a 20 mA line current interface. The SS1 has, for the receiver and for the transmitter, a current source and current drain, so that coupling partners without current sink can be connected. The interface module is a 40-pin (dual-in-line) hybrid circuit which is used in the socket provided on the SS4 communications module. When inserting the module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide. Features * electrical isolation via optocoupler * independent transmit- and receive channels * 2 current sources * 2 current sinks * data transfer rate up to 38.4 kbaud 6 * max. cable length: 1000 m Recommended connection In order to achieve data transfer with the highest possible noise immunity, even at high baud rates and long cable lengths, we recommend that the cables are connected, so that the current source (+Iq) and transmitter (+/TxD) are located at the same cable end. In this case, the cable capacitance must only be charged with the diode voltage (receiver). If the transmitter (transmit transistor) is located as current source at the other cable end, the cable capacitance must be charged with approximately the supply voltage. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-23 Communications support modules Please compare the following connection examples: a) "P +Iq +TxD Cable capacitance -TxD +RxD -RxD -Iq "M b) "P +Iq +RxD +TxD -RxD Cable capacitance -Iq -TxD "M Fig. 6-5: Unfavorable cable connection: Current source and transmitter at different ends 6-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules a) "P +Iq +TxD +RxD -RxD -TxD -Iq "M b) "P +Iq 6 +TxD -TxD +RxD -Iq -RxD "M Fig. 6-6: Recommended cable connection: Current source and transmitter at the same end Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-25 Communications support modules 6.5.1 Pin assignment Pin Significance Pin Significance 1 +15 V 21 GND 2 GND 22 GND 3 - 23 - 4 GND 24 - 5 -15 V 25 - 6 Not assigned 26 - 7 Not assigned 27 -T*D 8 Not assigned 28 - 9 Not assigned 29 Not assigned 10 T*D 30 Not assigned 11 NC 31 -Iq2 12 R*D 32 - 13 - 33 - 14 - 34 +T*D 15 -R*D 35 - 16 - 36 - 17 - 37 -Iq1 18 Not assigned 38 +Iq1 19 +Iq2 39 - 20 Not assigned 40 +R*D Table 6-2 Pin assignment of the SS1 (dual inline, 40 pin) 6.5.2 Technical data General data Power supply 6-26 Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 8.6 mm Weight 11 g Data transfer rate Max. 38.4 kbaud Max. cable length Max. 1000 m +5 V Max. 95 mA +15 V Max. 75 mA -15 V Max. 75 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.6 Interface module SS2 Order No. 6DD1688-1AB0 Description The SS4 communications module can be equipped with an additional/extended RS 232 (V.24) interface using the SS2 interface module. The interface module is a 40 pin (dual-in-line) hybrid device which can be inserted in the socket provided on the SS4 communication module. When inserting the sub-module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide. Features * suitable for modem connection * data transfer rates up to 38.4 kbaud * max. cable length: 15 m * external connections with V.28 signal level: E2, D1, D2, S1.2, S2, M1, M2, M5, T1, T2, T4 6.6.1 Pin assignment Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Pin Significance Pin 1 +15 V 21 Ground 2 Ground 22 Ground 3 +5V 23 T4 4 Ground 24 M2 5 -15 V 25 NC 6 Significance 6 *DCD 26 M1 7 *CTS 27 NC 8 *RTS 28 E2 9 *DTR 29 S1.2 10 T*D 30 M5 11 *(TR*C) 31 - 12 R*D 32 - 13 *(RT*C) 33 Not assigned 14 Not assigned 34 Not assigned 15 Not assigned 35 Not assigned 16 D1 36 - 17 T2 37 T1 18 D2 38 - 19 Not assigned 39 - 20 S2 40 - 6-27 Communications support modules 6.6.2 Technical data General data Power supply 6-28 Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 8.6 mm Weight 11 g Data transfer rate Max. 38.4 kbaud Max. distance 15 m +15 V Max. 75 mA +5 V Max. 95 mA -15 V Max. 75 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.7 Interface module SS31 Order No. 6DD1688-1AC1 Description The SS4 communications module can be equipped with an RS 485 interface to establish a USS bus connection using the SS31 interface submodule. The interface module is a 40 pin (dual-in-line) hybrid device which can be inserted in the socket provided on the SS4 communications module. When inserting the module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide. Features * data transfer rate up to 1 Mbaud * max. cable length dependent on the baud rate: 200 m at 1 Mbaud * no terminating resistor Enabling the transmitter To enable the transmitter, the RTS signal must be set to 1". This enable signal is generated using an appropriate jumper in the connector of the SS4 communications module. 6.7.1 Pin assignment Pin No Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6 Function Pin No Function 1 Not assigned 21 0V 2 0V 22 0V 3 5V 23 -TxD 4 0V 24 +TxD 5 Not assigned 25 Not assigned 6 DCD 26 +RTxC 7 0V 27 -RTxC 8 RTS 28 +DCD 9 Not assigned 29 -DCD 10 TxD 30 +RxD 11 TRxC 31 -RxD 12 RxD 32 5V 13 RTxC 33 5V 14 Not assigned 34 Not assigned 15 -RTS 35 0V 16 +RTS 36 0V 17 -TRxC 37 Not assigned 18 +TRxC 38 Not assigned 19 Not assigned 39 Not assigned 20 Not assigned 40 Not assigned 6-29 Communications support modules Table 6-3 Pin assignment of SS31, dual-in-line version, 40 pin 6.7.2 Technical data General data Power supply 6-30 Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 9.0 mm Weight Approx. 15 g Data transfer rate Max. 1 Mbaud Cable length Max. 200 m Power supply voltage +5 V +/- 5% Current drain, nominal value 90 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.8 Communications module SS4 Order No. 6DD1688-0AD0 Description The following serial interfaces (data transfer protocols) can be implemented using the SS4 communications module: Protocol Application DUST1 Connecting configuring- and operator control PCs, e. g. to load the program mode and for start-up (commissioning) DUST2 Connecting a message printer DUST3 Connecting SIMATIC S5 (AS 512 or CP 525) USS Connecting * OP2 operator control panels * VD1 text displays * drive converters to the process coupling; The SS4 is USS master and can be operated on the USS bus. Max. baud rate: 187.5 kbaud CS7 plug-in module The communications module is a plug-in module for the CS7 support module. The CS7 support module, the communications module and its selected receptacle are configured using HWConfig. A maximum of 3 communication modules can be inserted on the CS7. 6 Data is transferred with the CPU modules via a 16 kbyte dual port RAM which is located on the CS7 support module. Physical interface The configurable SS4 interface has, as standard an RS 232 physical interface to connect to the COM interfaces of a PC. Other physical interfaces can be selected using an optional interface module which can be inserted on the SS4: Interface module Physical interface (signal level along the cable) Application SS1 20 mA line current (TTY) Long data transfer lines; interrupted lines can be reliably identified SS2 RS 232 (V.24") For printers with control signals (RTS, CTS) SS31 RS 485 USS protocol The maximum baud rate is 187.5 kbaud and is dependent on the associated protocol software and if relevant, the interface modules used (refer under interface modules). 6.8.1 Connecting programmers or PC Connecting cables for PG740, PG750 or PG770 programmers can be assembled using the SM8 parts set (for SS4) or an appropriate parts set for Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-31 Communications support modules the programmer side, according to the following drawing. A 4-core screened round cable is required (e. g. LICYC 4*0,5, Metrofunk). Operating a PC or PG750/770 via the standard RS 232 (V.24) interface: RS 232 interface 1 10 19 1 9 18 26 13 25 14 SS4 PG750/770 ( COM 1, V24 ) Fig. 6-7 SS4 at a PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the RS 232 interface (the two jumpers for the PC are not required!) 20mA interface Operating the PG750/770 at the active SS4 communications module (active: Line current source and -sink on the SS4 side; thus, higher data integrity can be achieved with long cables and high baud rates): 1 10 19 9 18 26 1 13 25 14 PG750/770 ( COM 1, 20mA ) passive SS4 active Fig. 6-8 SS4 at PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the 20mA interface (active) Operating the PG750/770 at the passive SS4 communications module (passive: Line current source and -sink are not at the SS4 side): 1 10 19 9 18 26 SS4 passive 1 14 13 25 PG750/770 ( COM 1, 20mA ) active Fig. 6-9 SS4 at PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the 20mA interface (passive) NOTE 6-32 If the PG750/770 is operated as passive 20 mA current interface, then switches S3/2 and S3/3 in the PG must be opened (refer to the PG750/770 Manual). Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.8.2 USS connection for OP2, VD1 Connecting cables for the OP2 operator control device or the VD1 numerical display can be assembled using the SM8 parts set (for SS4) or an appropriate parts set for OP2/VD1 (OP2: Parts set SM5) according to the following diagrams. A 4-core screened round cable is required (e. g. LICYC 4*0,5, Metrofunk). Bus termination In order to increase the data integrity, the bus cable at both ends (at the first and last nodes) must be terminated using a resistor network: * an 150 resistor between the RS485+, RS485- data signal lines * one 390 resistor each from the data signal cables RS485+ to +5 V and from RS485- to ground to define a quiescent signal level when a node is not transmitting (basis network") For the VD1 numerical display, the bus termination (including basis network) is already integrated in the unit. These can be activated using the two DIL switches S1/S2. USS bus with connection RS485+ 390R RS485- VD1 390R S1 - ON S2 - ON 6 150R 390R 390R SS4 150R OP2 Fig. 6-10 SS4 at OP2 and VD1; with bus terminating circuitry Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-33 Communications support modules +5V Resistor to the supply voltage 390 RS485+ Bus terminating resistor 150 RS485- Resistor to the signal reference 390 0V Fig. 6-11 RS 485 bus termination 22 390 5 RS485+ 8 SS4 USS bus 150 21 17 RS485390 18 7 14 2 20 Fig. 6-12 Connector assignment SS4 with bus termination 6-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules USS bus cable without circuitry 5 RS485+ 8 SS4 USS bus 21 RS485- 17 Incoming 7 14 Outgoing bus cable 2 20 Fig. 6-13 SS4 Connector assignment without bus termination (SS4 at the center of the bus cable) + 390 + Screen 390 6 Data cable 150 390 150 Potential bonding 390 Housing ground Grounding rail Fig. 6-14 Screening and potential bonding of the data cable Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-35 Communications support modules 6.8.3 Supplementary components * SM8 connector parts set (26 pin, high-density plug connector) * interface module: A 40-pin dual inline socket X51 is provided in the communications module. An interface module can be inserted in this socket in order to implement an RS 485 (for USS) or 20mA interface instead of the existing RS 232. - interface module SS1 (20 mA) - interface module SS2 (RS 232) - interface module SS31 (RS 485) When inserting the interface module, the mounting position must be observed: The recesses of the socket of the interface module (and pin 1, marked by the point) and that of the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide. 6.8.4 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity Front panel grounding with CS7 The front panel of the communications module must be connected to the front panel of the CS7 using the cables provided with the CS7. Cable screen The data transfer cable screen (bus cable) must be grounded to a grounding rail through the largest possible surface area where the cable enters the equipment. In addition, the screen must be connected to the housing in the connector housing. The connector must be screwed to the communications module. Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" 6-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.8.5 SS4 diagnostic functions LED on CS7 Each receptacle of the CS7 support module has 2 LEDs, which allow diagnostic of the associated communication module (operating and fault/error conditions). LEDs on CS7 Significance for SS4 Green Yellow H10 / H20 / H30 H11 / H21 / H31 Dark Dark Communications module not initialized Flashing Flashing RAM test error Flashing Dark Hardware of the communications module is initialized; wait for a connection to be established to the initializing CPU module Lit Dark DUST / USS initialized Lit Lit Data transfer running Dark Lit Software error Table 6-4 Functions of the LEDs on CS7 LED on SS4 6 An additional four LEDs for interface diagnostics is provided on the communications module. However, when installed these LEDs are not visible. LED on SS4 H1 H2 H3 H4 Significance for SS4 Dark / lit: Hex monitor not receiving Flickers / glows: Hex monitor receiving data Dark / lit: Hex monitor not transmitting data Flickers / glows: Hex monitor transmitting data Dark / lit: DUST/USS interface not transmitting Flickers / glows: DUST/USS interface transmitting data Dark / lit: DUST/USS interface not receiving data Flickers / glows: DUST/USS interface receiving data Table 6-5 Functions of the LEDs on SS4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-37 Communications support modules Diagnostics interface X5 The 26-pin interface connector X5 includes, in addition to the signals of the configurable interface, also the signals of an RS 232 diagnostics interface (hexadecimal monitor"). The required connecting cable, together with the cable of the configurable interface must be connected at the interface connector to use this diagnostics interface: Pin Diagnostics interface X5 (RS-232) 1 TxD 9 GND 26 RxD 1 10 19 1 9 18 26 13 25 14 SS4 Hex m onitor (V.24) Fig. 6-15 Pin assignment of the diagnostics interface 26-pin high density plug connector to the SS4 interface module SM8 Configured interface (DUST/USS) Connector for PC (9-, 25 pin) Fig. 6-16 Connecting the configuring- and diagnostics interface at connector X5. 6-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.8.6 Connector assignment X5 Pin RS 232 standard interface RS 232 with SS2 20 mA with SS1 RS 485 with SS31 1 TxD +RTS RxD +TRxD 5 CTS RS485+ 6 DCD +RTxC 7 GND 8 DCD 2 3 4 9 TxD GND GND 10 11 P15 +RxD GND GND P15 P15 P15 +Iq1 13 RTS 14 +RxD -RxD 15 -RTS RTxC -TRx RTxC RS485- GND GND 19 20 GND GND -TxD -RTxC DTR 21 -DCD -Iq1 -RxD 22 P5 P5 P5 P5 23 P5 P5 P5 P5 24 25 6 RxD 17 18 +DCD +TxD 12 16 +Iq2 N15 TRxC -Iq2 N15 N15 N15 26 Table 6-6 Pin assignment of connector X5 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-39 Communications support modules 6.8.7 Technical data General data Power supply Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 22 x 70 x 184 Weight: 0.2 kg The power supply (+5V, +15V and -15V) is established via the 48-pole plug connector X1 to CS7. +5 V 0,4 A +15 V 20 mA -15V 20 mA When calculating the total current drain of the communications module, the current drain, if relevant, of the inserted interface module must be taken into account. 6-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules 6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52 Order No. SS5: 6DD1688-0AE0 SS52: 6DD1688-0AE2 Description SS5 SS52 Master interface for * Master- or slave interface for PROFIBUS-DP (SINEC L2-DP) PROFIBUS-FMS (SINEC L2-FMS), FMS is a utility-oriented client/server communications Plug-in CS7 module including the shared input", SYNC, FREEZE functions * MPI (multiple-point protocol; for SIMATIC S7/M7) The communications module is a module which is inserted into the CS7 support module. The CS7 support module, the communications module and its selected receptacle are configured using HWConfig. A maximum of 3 communication modules can be inserted in each CS7. Data is transferred with the CPU modules via a 16 kbyte dual port RAM, which is located on the CS7 support module. Interfaces Connector X5 has the following interfaces: 6 * PROFIBUS interface with RS 485 format with electrical isolation * 5V power supply for the Optical Link Modules OLM with electrical isolation (floating) * SS52: Parameterizing- and diagnostics interface with RS 232 format (for COM PROFIBUS) PROFIBUS connection PROFIBUS is connected at connector X5: * directly with the SINEC L2 bus connector * via an SINEC L2 bus terminal; in this case, the drop cable capacitance must be taken into account depending on the baud rate The SINEC L2 bus terminal as well as the SINEC L2 bus connector have terminating resistors which can be switched-in. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-41 Communications support modules 6.9.1 Supplementary components Bus connection * SINEC L2 bus terminal RS 485, 1.5 m connecting cable * SINEC L2 bus terminal RS 485, 3 m connecting cable * SINEC L2 bus connector RS 485 * SINEC L2 optical bus terminals PF/SF Example of a cable: Designation Order No. connecting cable (Profibus) 6XV1 830-0AH10 bus connector 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0 For further information, refer to: - SINEC Catalog IK10 - SIMATIC S5/S7 Catalog - Equipment Manual "SIMATIC S5 ET200 distributed peripheral system" SS5 parameterization A COM database must be generated and loaded in the SS5 using the COMSS5 program so that the SS5 can be used. COMSS5 can run on - PG programmers under S5-DOS, or - PC with S5-DOS emulation or COM adapter The database is, for example, loaded into the SS5 via PROFIBUS using the CP5412 PC plug-in card (PCMCIA). SS52 parameterization To operate the SS52 as master, a COM database must be generated, using the COM PROFIBUS (or COM ET200) program, and loaded into the SS52. The program runs on a PC under Windows. The database is loaded into the SS52 via * PROFIBUS (with PC PROFIBUS card CP5411, CP5511 or MPI card or interface) * COM1/2 interface of the PC and RS 232 parameterizing/diagnostics interface of the SS52 with SS52load" driver program. COM PROFIBUS must also be ordered if SS52 is configured as master: Order No.: 6ES5 895-6SE12 (German) Drive program SS52load" The driver program SS52load is included in COM PROFIBUS from V3.1 or can be obtained at no charge from Siemens via the Intranet: ftp://www.erlf80.asi.siemens.de/SIMADYN_D/html/treiber.htm 6-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules We are preparing an Internet page for SIMADYN D. 6.9.2 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity Grounding the front panel with CS7 The front panel of the communications module must be connected to the front panel of the CS7 using the cables provided with the CS7. Cable screening The screen of the data transfer cable (bus cable) must be grounded to a grounding rail through the largest possible surface area where the cable enters the equipment. In addition, the screen in the connector housing must be connected to the housing. The connector must be tightly screwed to the communications module. Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" 6.9.3 Diagnostics LED Each receptacle of the CS7 support module has 2 LEDs, which allow diagnostics of the associated communications module (operating- and error/fault conditions). CS7 LED for SS5 LEDs on CS7 Green Yellow H10 / H20 / H30 H11 / H21 / H31 Dark Dark Dark Lit 6 Significance for SS5 Processor not initialized Without database at the bus; COMSS5 must be parameterized Dark Flickers No database, with bus activity; COMSS5 must be parameterized CS7 LED for SS52 Slow flash Dark Initialization erroneous; COMSS5 database erroneous Fast flash Dark Initialization phase 1 Lit Dark Initialization phase 2 Lit Lit Correctly connected at the bus; presently no bus activity Lit Flickers Bus activity LED Dark Flashing, 5 Hz Green Yellow H10 / H20 / H30 H11 / H21 / H31 CPU stopped No bus operation (initialization phase) Fatal error: Error on the bus, e. g. short-circuit: Read-out the error codes at Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-43 Communications support modules function block @CSPRO and Check the bus cable and other contact the SIMADYN bus nodes Hotline Flashing, 1 Hz Initialize the connection to the associated CPU module (@CSPRO); COM database not available or inactive (during download) check @CSPRO configuring; Flashing, 0.5 Hz - CFC- and COM configuring do not match; bus operation possible with some restrictions Lit Initialization O.K. Bus operation O.K. Additional LEDs are available on SS5/SS52; however, they are only visible when the module is inserted in an adapter card: LED on SS5 LEDs on SS5 Significance for SS5 D1 No function D2 No function D3 D4 LED on SS52 Off / on: Not transmitting; Flickers / glows: PROFIBUS interface transmitting data Off / on: Not receiving; Flickers / glows: PROFIBUS interface receiving data LEDs SS52 H1 Significance for SS52 On PROFIBUS interface operational Off PROFIBUS interface not operational 6.9.4 Connector assignment X5 SS5: 6-44 PIN Designation Function Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Communications support modules PIN Designation Function 1 - - 2 - - 3 RS485 + Receive- and transmit signal + (corresponding to data B) 4 RTS Request to send 5 M5EXT External ground; to supply OLMs 6 P5EXT 5V external; to supply OLMs 7 - - 8 RS485 - Receive- and transmit signal - (corresponding to data A) 9 RTS Request to send Table 6-7 SS5: Pin assignment of the 9-pin SUB D socket connector X5 6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 6-45 Communications support modules SS52: Pin Designation Explanation 1 RS 232: Ground For SS52load"; (for SS52 from edition, approx. 7.97!) 2 RS 232: TxD For SS52load": Transmit signal 3 RS485 + PROFIBUS: Receive- and transmit signal + (corresponding to data B) 4 RTS Request to send (to drive an OLM; 1" when transmitting; as for pin 9) 5 M5EXT External ground; to supply OLMs 6 P5EXT External P5; to supply OLMs 7 RS 232: RxD For SS52load": Receive signal 8 RS485 - PROFIBUS: Receive- and transmit signal (corresponding to data A) 9 RTS Request to send (to drive the OLM; 1" when transmitting; as for pin 4) Table 6-8 SS52: Pin assignment of the 9-pin SUB D socket connector X5 6.9.5 Technical data General data Power supply Dimensions (W x H x D) 70 x 184 x 22 mm Weight 0.2 kg The power supply (+5V, +15V and -15V) is established via the 48-pin plug connector X1 to CS7. +5 V 6-46 SS5: max. 0,4 A SS52: max. 0,7 A +15 V max. 10 mA -15 V max. 10 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 12.2004 Technology subrack 7 Technology subrack Overview 7.1 Technology subrack SRT400 7-2 7.2 Technology module T400 7-2 7 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 7-1 Technology subrack 7.1 Technology subrack SRT400 Order No. 6DD1682-0CG0 Description The subrack SRT400 has 2 slots to accept * 1 or 2 technology modules T400 * SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES communication modules - CB1 (PROFIBUS-DP) - CB2 (CAN) - SCB1 (binary and analog inputs/outputs connected to SCI1/2 via fiberoptic cable) - SCB2 (USS, Peer-to-Peer) Features * input voltage: 115 / 230 V * output voltage: - + 5 V, +/- 15 V for modules - 24 V DC for binary inputs/outputs * metal housing, closed at all sides * wall mounting 7.2 Technology module T400 7.2.1 General features Order No. 6DD1606-0AD0 Description The technology module T400 has a range of comprehensive peripheral functions (inputs/outputs) on the module. This allows it to be used by itself to realize favorably-priced smaller applications for drives and controls. It represents an innovated T300. As far as the backplane bus and module format, it is designed as option module for use in the SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71 (FC, SC) drive converters. A high-performance coupling to the basic control module of MASTER DRIVES (BASE BOARD" CU) is established via its dual port RAM. Further it can also be used in the SRT400 subrack(Technology Box"). Here, it can be used together with a second T400 or a MASTER DRIVES communications module (COM BOARD"). It is configured on a Windows 95-PC with SIMATIC STEP7 (HWConfig) and CFC. 7-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Technology subrack Inputs/outputs * 2 analog outputs * 5 analog inputs * 2 binary outputs * 4 bi-directional binary inputs/outputs * 8 binary inputs, of which a maximum of 4 can be used to call-up interrupt tasks * 2 incremental encoder connections with zero pulse * 2 coarse pulse connections to suppress zero pulses; rough pulses can be optionally used as binary input * 2 absolute value encoder connections (SSI/EnDat interface); absolute value encoder connection 2, optionally to serial interface 2! * Serial interface 1 for - download and service with DUST1 protocol(RS 232) or - USS protocol (RS 485) * Serial interface 2 (RS 485), optionally to absolute value encoder connection 2 for USS (master or slave) or peer-to-peer Functional features * The module is configured by downloading data into the permanently inserted flash EPROM (the EPROM is soldered-in) * MASTER DRIVES operator control panel OP1S and SIMOVIS can be connected via USS slave for parameterization (for applications without MASTER DRIVES BASE-BOARD (CU), e. g. in the SRT400) * 2*T400 can be used in the SRT400 subrack * Selectable T400 synchronizing from the BASE- or COM BOARD, synchronizing signals can be output to the BASE- and COM BOARD; * Dual port RAM interface to MASTER DRIVES BASE BOARD, CU and interface to the dual port RAM on a communications module (COM BOARD CB) Features, electronics * 32-bit RISC processor, 32 MHz * 2Mbyte Flash for compressed program code. * 4Mbyte DRAM for the de-compressed (unzipped) program which can be run * 32 kbyte permanent change memory (EEPROM) (e.g. for fuzzy control) * 4 kbyte dual port RAM Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 7-3 7 Technology subrack Software protection A socket for a 28 pin EPLD device (ALTERA) is provided on the module for copy-protecting the user program (Hardlock-PAL"). Using a special function block, this EPLD block can be checked and the program execution stopped if it has the incorrect code or no code. Further information on request. 7.2.2 Mechanical design, terminals * The T400 can be used at slot 2 in the MASTER DRIVES electronics box (outer right!). The PROFIBUS-DP interface (CB1) or CAN bus (CB2) can be used at slot 3. The connection to the baseboard at slot 1 and to the expansion board ("COMBOARD") at slot 3 is established via two 64-pin plug connectors. * The PC board is 100 mm * 233.35 mm. The maximum component height above the PC board is 14 mm. * All of the input and output terminals are located at the front of the module. MINI-COMBICON plug connectors from the Phonix company are used. * 55 terminals (five blocks of 11) are located at the foremost edge of the module. * Several terminals are assigned twice as a result of the restricted space. The actual function is selected using a switch or is configured. * Operation without fan is possible for a 55C ambient temperature!. * The backplane bus wiring in the SRT400 technology box is designed so that two T400 can be used. In this case, connector X2 (below) of the lefthand slot is connected with connector X1 (top) of the righthand slot. 7.2.3 Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation Incremental encoder * 2 incremental encoder inputs, with tracks A, B, and zero pulse of which - encoder 1 for HTL signal level - encoder 2 for either HTL or differential signals (RS422); * The pulses for encoder 1 (tracks A, B, zero pulse) can be optionally retrieved from the BASE BOARD via the backplane bus (incremental encoder simulation" of the CUx; as TTL signal level). The pulse source is selected by configuring the speed actual value block NAV. * Max. input frequency 1MHz * Selectable, direction of rotation-dependent evaluation of the zero pulses 7-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Technology subrack Coarse / fine pulse evaluation A coarse/fine (zero) pulse evaluation is provided to suppress noise- or bounce pulses for synchronous- and positioning tasks. The coarse pulse enables a window for the fine pulse. Generally, coarseand fine pulse are defined by the mechanical design of the machine (e.g. cams). The smoothing time of the coarse pulse input is approx. 1 ms (as for binary inputs). The fine pulse has no smoothing time. A differentiation is made between the following situations when evaluating the coarse- and fine pulses: The evaluation signal is generated, if... Case A fine pulse is received; the coarse pulse is not taken into 1 account; (also for disturbances/noise on the fine pulse) Case Coarse- and fine pulse have an H signal level, however only 1 2 evaluation signal per coarse pulse (fine faults/noise are suppressed) Case Coarse- and fine pulse have an H signal level, 3 fine pulse noise is not suppressed. Case After deleting the coarse pulse, a positive fine pulse edge was 4 identified. Additional fine pulses (noise) are suppressed! Case Coarse pulse is inactive (L signal level) and fine pulses are 5 active (H signal level), the fine pulse noise is not suppressed! 7 Coarse pulse Fine pulse Evaluation signal Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Fig. 7-1 Coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation 7.2.3.1 Pulse encoder 2 Pulse encoders with different signal levels can be connected at encoder input 2: * RS422 * HTL ( 3V) * HTL (3V ... 8V) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 7-5 Technology subrack * TTL (0V ... 5V) The setting is made using the DIL switches S2/1 - S2/8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fig. 7-2 Switch S2 Track signals A and B are set according to the following table: Significance TTL RS422 HTL (3V) Switch S2 Setting Significance TTL (0V ... 5V) Switch S2 Setting 1 ON 1 ON 2 ON 2 ON 3 ON 3 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF 2 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 3 OFF HTL (3V ... 8V) The zero impulse can be switched indepenent from Track A or B: TTL RS422 HTL (3V) 4 ON 5 ON 4 OFF 5 ON TTL (0V ... 5V) HTL (3V ...8V) 4 ON 5 OFF 1 OFF 2 OFF For differential signals, bus terminating resistors can be switched-in via switch S2/6 - 8: Significance Switch S2 Track A 6 Track B 7 Zero pulse 8 The terminating resistors are switched-out in the OFF setting; they are switched-in in the ON setting. The switches can only be changed when the module has been withdrawn. The switches are not accessible when the module is inserted. 7-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Technology subrack 7.2.4 Absolute value encoders The T400 has up to 2 synchronous-serial interfaces for multi-turn absolute value encoders: * SSI- and EnDat protocol (according to the Heidenhain company) * Selectable cycle between 100 kHz and 2 MHz * Either dual- or Gray-, or Gray-excess code can be selected However, terminals 72 - 75 can only be alternatively used as - second synchronous-serial interface ("absolute value encoder 2") or - peer-to-peer or USS protocol It is possible to simultaneously use, for example, peer-to-peer and "absolute value encoder 1" (terminals 76-79). 7.2.5 Serial interfaces T400 has 2 serial interfaces: Service" interface 1 The following is realized via interface 1, * the program is downloaded * service (CFC in the test mode", "basic service") for start-up (DUST1 protocol). Baud rate: 19.2 kbaud 7 Optionally, the USS protocol (master/slave), to connect a MASTER DRIVES OP1S operator control unit or SIMOVIS can be set per hardware switch on the T400. Interface 1 has both physical interfaces (can be optionally used!): Interface 2 * RS 232 for PC coupling (download, service) * RS 485 (2 wire) e.g. for USS to the operator control panel connection (OPx, SIMOVIS) or to higher-level (master) systems (SIMATIC); incl. terminating resistors which can be switched-in Interface 2 is a mix asynchronous and synchronous interface with RS 485 data transfer signal level: * Peer-to-peer with full duplex, 4-wire connection * USS protocol (master/slave) with half-duplex, 2-wire connection The following baud rates can be set: Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 7-7 Technology subrack 9.6 kbaud 19.2 kbaud 38.4 kbaud 93.75 kbaud 187.5 kbaud 7.2.5.1 Bus termination Bus terminating resistors for serial interfaces 1- and 2 can be switched-in via switch S1/1-S1/8 if the T400 is located at the beginning or end of the bus. Terminals Switch S1 Serial interface 1 70/71 1,2 Serial interface 2 (2-conductor, 4conductor) 74/75 3,4 Serial interface 2 (4-conductor) 72/73 5,6 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fig. 7-3 Switch S1 The terminating resistors are switched-in in the ON setting. The switch settings can only be changed after the module has been withdrawn. These switches are not accessible if the module is inserted. Switch S7 has no function. 7.2.5.2 Communications switch Switch S1/8 toggles between the service- and USS protocol at serial interface 1. More detailed information can be taken from the description of the USS protocol. 7-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Technology subrack 7.2.6 Synchronizing possibilities The T400 offers various ways to process and transfer synchronizing signals. The processing possibilities are listed in the following diagram. The three selector switches indicated, are set by appropriate configuring. Inputs Steer Processor Com board X2 / A26 L_INT_DPR_PT Port A/4 SYNC_COM Outputs Com board X2 / B25 L_INT_PT_DPR T0GATE T0OUT Port A/5 SYNC_BASE Base board X1 / A26 L_INT_DPR_CU Base board X1 / B25 L_INT_CU_DPR Fig. 7-4 Synchronizing possibilities Synchronizing possibilities The basic cycle of the T400 can be taken from three various sources (can be configured in HWConfig): * Basic cycle time of the T400 (standard) * Synchronizing signal of the BASE BOARDs (L_INT_CU_DPR (connector X1/B25) for T0GATE) * Synchronizing signal of the COM BOARDs (L_INT_DPR_PT (connector X2/A26) for T0GATE) Thus, a cycle from the CBX can synchronize the T400 and BASE BOARD (CU). Configurable interrupt tasks can also be called using the synchronizing signals from BASE- or COM BOARDs (ports A/4, A/5). Sync signals for BASE- and COM BOARD The T400 can supply BASE- and COM BOARD synchronizing signals, which come from the following three sources and can be selected by appropriately configuring: * Basic cycle time of the T400 (T0OUT of MFB1) * Directly connecting synchronizing signals from the BASE- or COM BOARD to the other module * In an FP with a special FB-generated synchronizing signal (SYNC_BASE, SYNC_COM) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 7-9 7 Technology subrack Synchronizing 2 T400: BASE BOARD-T400, synchronized via X2/B25 --> X1/B25 TECH BOARDT400, and TECH BOARD-T400 synchronized via X1/A26 --> X2/A26 BASE BOARDT400; 7.2.7 Parameters The I/O of the function blocks as well as the parameters can be defined (configured) on the T400. Thus, these I/O can be read and changed using the "parameter mechanism" via * Dual port RAM * PROFIBUS (CB1) * USS protocol (for operator control device, SIMOVIS) 2000 parameters can be configured, whereby a differentiation can be made between those at the operator control panel (and SIMOVIS), and the basic drive converter parameters (r" and P") using one of the two prefixes * H" * L" 7.2.8 Terminal assignment All of the signals are connected at 55 terminals, which are accessible from the front. They are distributed over 5 11-pin MINI-COMBICON plug connectors in a 3.5 mm grid dimension (connectors X5 - X9): 7-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Technology subrack T400 terminal assignment + 24 V external (for binary inputs and outputs) Bi-directional binary input and output 1 Bi-directional binary input and output 2 Bi-directional binary input and output 3 Bi-directional binary input and output 4 Ground, binary inputs and outputs Binary output 1 Binary output 2 Binary input 1 (interrupt-capable) Binary input 2 (interrupt-capable) Binary input 3 (interrupt-capable) Binary input 4 (interrupt-capable) Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Ground, binary inputs and outputs Encoder 2 : Track A ( HTL) Encoder 2: Track A+ ( RS422) Encoder 2: Track B ( HTL) Encoder 2: Track B+ ( RS422) Encoder 2: Zero pulse (HTL) Encoder 2: Zero pulse + (RS422) Encoder 2: Coarse pulse Encoder 2 ground Serial interface 1: Rx-RS232 Serial interface 1: Tx-RS232 Serial interface ground Serial interface . 1: Tx/Rx-RS485+ Serial interface 1: Tx/Rx-RS485Serial interface 2: Rx-RS485+ Absolut-Encoder 2: Data+ Serial interface 2: Rx-RS485Absolut-Encoder 2: DataSerial interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485+ Absolut-Encoder 2: Pulse+ Serial interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485Absolut-Encoder 2: PulseAbsolut-Encoder 1: Data+ Absolut-Encoder 1: DataAbsolut-Encoder 1: Pulse+ Absolut-Encoder 1: Pulse+ 15 V -Encoder Power Supply (max. 100 mA) Increm.-Encoder 1: Track A Increm.-Encoder 1: Track B Increm.-Encoder 1: Zero pulse Increm.-Encoder 1: Coarse pulse Increm.-Encoder 1 Ground Increm.-Encoder 2: Track A(with RS422) Increm.-Encoder 2: Track B(with RS422) Increm.-Encoder 2: Zero pulse- (with RS422) Ground, analog inputs and outputs Analog input 1 Analog input 1+ Analog input 1Analog input 2 Analog input 2+ Analog input 2Analog input 3 Analog input 4 Analog input 5 Analog input 1 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Con. Con.-pin Terminal X5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 10 65 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 X6 X7 X8 X9 7-11 7 Technology subrack Analog input 2 Ground, analog inputs and outputs Note: Grounding 10 98 11 99 All grounds are connected mutually via inductivity and with electronics ground. The grounds connections of interfaces 1 and 2 analog inputs/outputs binary inputs/outputs. incremental encoders 1 and 2 are connected to the T400 electronics ground through 0 Ohm resistors, reactors and capacitors which can be soldered-out. For production-related reasons, the 0 Ohm resistor is an SMD device (not separately connected) and when required must be soldered-out (to interrupt the electrical connection)! 7.2.9 Technical data General data Power supply No. of slots occupied 1 Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220 Weight approx. 0.6 kg The T400 requires the following voltages at the upper backplane bus connector X1: Rated voltage min. max. +5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1000 mA +15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 140 mA + encoder load (max. 100 mA, electronically limited) -15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 140 mA 20 V 30 V 24 V (external) 7-12 Typ. current drain 150 mA + binary output current Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Technology subrack Analog inputs No. 5 Type Of which, 2 are differential inputs, 3 unipolar; non-floating Analog outputs Binary inputs Input voltage range -10 V +/- 4 LSB to +10 V +/- 4 LSB (1 LSB = 4.88 mV) Input resistance 20 kOhm Input filter 3 dB transition frequency: 1.5 kHz Resolution 12 bits Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature range Linearity + 1 LSB Offset error + 3 LSB Max. conversion time 15 s Differential input resistance > 20 kOhm Hardware smoothing 5 s No. 2 Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V Output current +/- 10 mA Resolution 12 bits Monotony 11 bits over the complete temperature range Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature range Short-circuit protection to ground Yes Slew rate of the output Approx. 3.4 V/s Offset- and amplification error (gain error) + 3 LSB No. 10 and max. 4 bi-directional non-floating Input voltage 7 24 V DC nominal voltage for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or inputs open-circuit for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V Input current for 0 signal 0 mA for 1 signal 8 mA typ. Input smoothing Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 500 s 7-13 Technology subrack Binary outputs No. 2 and max. 4 bi-directional; non-floating Power supply voltage From external nominal value 24 V DC perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s Output current for 1 signal nominal current 50 mA (also corresponds to max. value) Short-circuit protection Electronic and thermal Limiting inductive switch-off voltages Supply voltage + 1 V Residual current 20 A for 0 signal Signal level 15 V incremental encoder for 0 signal Max. 3 V for 1 signal Supply voltage - 2.5 V Switching delay Max. 15 s No. of encoders Total max. 2 Type Differential inputs, electrical isolation (floating) (optocoupler) Input voltage range Differential voltage -30 V to +30 V Input voltage (for 15 mA load) 7-14 for 0 signal -30 V to +4 V for 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V Input current Approx. 15 mA (electronically limited) Pulse frequency Max.. 1 MHz (track frequency) Phase difference of the track signals Independent of the pulse frequency at least 200 ns Input filter Can be configured via software (function block) Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 8 Program memory modules / Interface modules Overview 8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 8-2 8.2 Interface module SE13.1 8-4 8.3 Interface module SE26.1 8-7 8.4 Interface module SB10 8-11 8.5 Interface module SB60 8-17 8.6 Interface module SB61 8-22 8.7 Interface module SB70 8-29 8.8 Interface module SB71 8-35 8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 8-41 8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-1 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 Order Nos. MS5: 6DD1610-0AH0 MS51: 6DD1610-0AK0 MS52: 6DD1610-0AH2 Description The MS5, MS51 and MS52 program memory modules are used to save the processor program, configured by the user with HWConfig and CFC (including the operating system). Installation / programming The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle of the CPU module provided and the user program can be downloaded in two ways: * via a PCMCIA card, integrated in the PC (offline loading) (PC card) * directly from the PC via a serial communications link into the memory module inserted in the CPU module (online loading) Program size The size of the software to be loaded into the memory module ("zipped" to approximately 50%), and the size of the available program memory in the CFC is displayed under the following memory item: Target system / load / info Memory overview The differences in the application and the memory expansion of the MS5, MS51 and MS52 program memory modules are shown in the following table: Application MS5 MS51 MS52 Flash memory to store the configuring software 2 Mbyte 4 Mbyte 8 Mbyte EEPROM for operating parameters which can be changed 8 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 8 Kbyte Table 8-1 NOTE Application areas of the program memory modules The flash memory is a non-volatile memory which can be electrically programmed and erased. PCMCIA and JEIDA industry standard 68 pin memory card 8-2 Write protect switch Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.1.1 Technical data General data Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 85.6 x 3.3 mm Weight 30 g Power supply MS5 MS51 MS52 Power supply +5 V +5 V +5 V Current drain 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA Connection to JEIDA/PCMCIA 68 Pin Access time 200 ns 8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-3 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.2 Interface module SE13.1 Order No. 6DD1681-0BD1 Description The interface module is used to adapt passive signals via voltage divider and T elements. It includes * 6 T elements which can be connected/configured using solder pins, and * 2 voltage dividers which can be freely configured Module design * housing for snapping-on to mounting rail * 3-row, 3 x 16-pin terminal block * 6 configurable T elements * 2 voltage dividers with spindle potentiometers which can be freely dimensioned * solder pins to connect components with axially-located connections * labeling field for the user to identify his plant/system T element ZO ZE Input ZA Output ZM GND Screen Fig. 8-1 8-4 Connecting the T element on the interface module Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules Voltage divider R-1 Eingang 1 R-2 Eingang 2 U 2K2 Ausgang Schirm Fig. 8-2 Wiring the voltage divider on the interface module 8.2.1 Application information The circuits on the interface module are defined by the user. Here are some of the examples of the circuits which can be implemented: * filters: - low-pass - high-pass - bandpass - bandstop - RC element * voltage divider Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" 8 8.2.2 Technical data General data Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 77 x 112.5 x 72.5 mm Weight 0.23 kg Power supply Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Voltage divider, nominal value 1.76 to 2.64 k Power supply Max. +33 V DC Current drain Max. 15 mA Maximum rating 500 mW 8-5 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.2.3 Connector assignment X1 Terminal Designation Terminal 1 Input volt. divider 1 21 2 Output 22 3 Input volt. divider 2 23 4 Output 24 " 44 5 Input channel 1 25 GND channel 1 45 6 Output 26 " 46 7 Input channel 2 27 GND channel 2 47 " " " GND volt. divider 1 " GND volt. divider 2 Terminal 41 42 43 8 Output 28 " 48 9 Input channel 3 29 GND channel 3 49 10 Output 30 " 50 11 Input channel 4 31 GND channel 4 51 " 12 Output 32 " 52 13 Input channel 5 33 GND channel 5 53 14 Output 34 " 54 15 Input channel 6 35 GND channel 6 55 16 Output 36 " 56 Table 8-2 8-6 " Designation " " " Designation Screen volt. divider 1 " Screen volt. divider 2 " Screen channel 1 " Screen channel 2 " Screen channel 3 " Screen channel 4 " Screen channel 5 " Screen channel 6 " Connector assignment of X1 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.3 Interface module SE26.1 Order No. 6DD1681-0CG1 Description The module is used to convert analog signal quantities and provide electrical isolation (floating). The module filters analog signals using a low-pass filter. Module design * housing for snapping-on to mounting rails * differential input * short-circuit proof output * operating message via LED * labeling field for module identification Features The module is supplied with 24 V DC. A DC/DC converter generates electrically isolated +/-15 V DC voltages from this 24 V DC supply. These supply the isolating- and signal amplifiers at the input. The 24 V DC power supply and the analog output are electrically connected. A second order Butterworth low pass filter filters the applied signal. The frequency characteristics and the transfer characteristics are specified in Chapter 1.6. A differential amplifier is used as the input circuitry. Thus, parallel voltage- or serial current measurements are possible. This allows analog signals of the plant/system to be processed in electrically-isolated (floating) SIMADYN D subracks. 8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-7 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.3.1 Application information The module has screw terminals to connect the input- and output signals. SIMADYN D is connected via an SU10, SU11 interface module which is connected to an input/output module (EA12) or an expansion module (IT41) using a ribbon cable. Example Fig. 8-3 8-8 Connecting example for the interface module SE26.1 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.3.2 Technical data General data Power supply Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 135 x 77 x 59 Weight 0.2 kg External power supply +24 V DC Range +20 to +30 V DC Briefly (t<500 ms) 1,5 x Vrated Current drain at 24 V 170 mA at the rated output current Signal level input +/- 10 V output +/- 10 V Input resistance 100 k Signal level +10 V Output load resistor >1 kOhm Zero point error 1) + 2 mV Maximum error +10 mV Push-pull output 5 mA Transfer frequency range: 1) 0 to 1 kHz A/AO = 0 dB 1 to 3 kHz A/AO 3 dB 25 C ambient temperature 8.3.3 Connector assignment Terminal block -X2 Terminal Terminal 04 Designation 031 Pos. input signal 032 Neg. input signal 05 Output ground 05 Input ground L+ P24 power supply Pext 1S Push-pull output 1S Connected with terminal X2/3S 2S Terminal connected with X2/05 input ground 2S Connected with terminal X3/05 3S Connected with X3/1S M M24 power supply Mext Table 8-3 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Designation 8 Terminal block -X3 Output signal Connections of terminal blocks X2 and X3 8-9 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.3.4 Diagram Fig. 2 Fig. 1 Fig. 8-4 8-10 Voltage- and frequency characteristic of interface module SE26.1 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.4 Interface module SB10 Order No. 6DD1681-0AE2 Description The interface module outputs binary signals from SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components to the plant/system or receives binary signals from the plant/system and transfers these to SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components. The connection to SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458components is established through ribbon cables and on the plant/system side, via terminals. There is no electrical isolation between the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components side and the plant/system side. Module design * housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails * ribbon cable connector (X1): - 8 pins for binary signals, 24 V DC - 2 pins for 1P, 1M power supply voltages * connector (X2), 2x 8 pin: - 8 terminals for 24 V DC binary signals - 8 terminals for the reference point (1M, 1P is also possible) * 1 terminal pair X3: 1P and 1M * double test socket X5: 1P(+), 1M(G) * diagnostic LEDs Power supply on the SIMADYN D side The power supply on the SIMADYN D side is fed-in at terminal X3: Terminal X3 Voltage at the SIMADYN D side 1P +24 V 1M 0V 8 To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0) The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. NOTE To connect the power supply see "User manual FM 458-1 DP" chapter "Installation and EMC guideline". Green LED The SIMADYN-side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P). Red LED The SIMADYN-side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault condition). Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-11 Program memory modules / Interface modules Test socket Voltages 1P and 1M can be used, via the double test socket (G; +) to simulate an input signal for SIMADYN D. Double test socket X5 ! WARNUNG Voltage + (1P from X3) +24 V G (1M from X3) 0V Explosion Hazard No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be non-hazardous. 8.4.1 Signals Yellow LED Each status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED (1...8). There is a screw connection for each signal at the two terminal strips X2: * terminals 1 to 8 for binary signals * terminals 51 to 58 for reference points Reference potential of the signals The reference points of the signals are either at 1M potential or 1P potential. The polarity is selected on the module using a solder link: X2 51..58 X5 1W 1P 1M + G 1P 1M X3 Fig. 8-5 NOTE 8-12 Solder link to set the signal reference points Link 1M-1W is inserted in the factory Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.4.2 Application information The interface module can be mounted both vertically and horizontally. Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" Example A typical application is shown in the following diagram: Fig. 8-6 Application example for SB10 interface module at the binary input-, output module EB11 The binary signals of the plant/system side are connected directly with the SIMADYN D modules via the interface module. A ribbon cable is used (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables). Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-13 8 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.4.3 Technical data General data Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm Weight Approx. 0.28 kg ambient temperature ambient temperature for approbations max. 50 C Power supply Description SIMADYN D Power supply voltage (VV) at the nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated Current drain 1) At the nominal value 1) 20 mA Maximum current per power supply cable 400 mA LED current drain without the load of the system modules The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules. Binary signals 8-14 No. 8 Nominal voltage value 24 V DC Maximum current per channel 30 mA Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.4.4 Connector assignment Flat connector X1 Terminal block X2 To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components). Terminal Channel 1 (binary input/output 1) 2 Channel 2 (binary input/output 2) 3 Channel 3 (binary input/output 3) 4 Channel 4 (binary input/output 4) 5 Channel 5 (binary input/output 5) 6 Channel 6 (binary input/output 6) 7 Channel 7 (binary input/output 7) 8 Channel 8 (binary input/output 8) 51 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 52 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 53 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 54 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 55 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 56 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 57 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) 58 Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set) Table 8-4 Conductor cross section Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Designation 1 Assignment of the binary inputs and outputs of interface module SB10 The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is 0,2mm, the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. 8 8-15 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.4.5 Block diagram X1 X2 1 1 51 1 8 8 58 8 1W 1P 1M 9 10 F X3 1 + P 2 Fig. 8-7 8-16 G Block diagram of interface module SB10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.5 Interface module SB60 Order No. 6DD1681-0AF4 Description 8 binary input signals can be adapted to the signal level of SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC, electrically-isolated (floating) via optocouplers using the SB60 interface module. The input signal voltage can be 120 V DC or AC. There is protective separation between the eight binary inputs and the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC rack. The eight binary inputs are electrically isolated with respect to one another. Module design * housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails * ribbon cable connector (X1): - 8 pins for binary outputs - 2 pins for 1P, 1M * connector (X2), 2x 12 pins: - 8 pins for binary inputs 120 V - 8 pins for the reference point * 1 terminal pair X3: - 1P and 1M for the voltage on the SIMADYN D side * LEDs for diagnostics * optocouplers to electrically isolate input and output Power supply on the SIMADYN D side The power supply at the SIMADYN D side is connected at terminal X3: Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN D side 1P +24 V 1M 0V 8 To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0) The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. ! NOTE To connect the power supply see "User manual FM 458-1 DP" chapter "Installation and EMC guideline". WARNUNG Between inputs this interface module have a protective separation Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 The system side ( rack including 24V power supply ) have a protective separation from touch dangerous voltage to the process side ( 8 input signals ). 8-17 Program memory modules / Interface modules Green LED The SIMADYN D power supply is indicated using a green LED (P). Red LED The SIMADYN D power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault condition). 8.5.1 Signals Signals up to a maximum of 120 V (nominal value) DC or AC can be connected at the SB60 interface module. Yellow LED The status of the binary interface module outputs (binary inputs for SIMADYN D) is indicated using yellow LEDs (1...8). There are two screw connections for each signal at terminal strip X2: * terminals 12, 22, ... up to 82 for binary signals 120 V * terminals 11, 21, ... up to 81 for the reference point NOTE To connect the signal lines to the terminals see "User manual FM 458-1 DP" chapter "Installation and EMC guideline". 8.5.2 Application information The interface module can only be vertically mounted due to the power loss which has to be dissipated. Other information 8-18 Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.5.3 Technical data General data Power supply Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm Weight Approx. 0.32 kg Nominal power supply voltage (VV) 24 V DC Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated Current drain at the nominal value 90 mA The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules. Binary inputs Number 8 Nominal input voltage 120 V AC/DC `1 signal' 98 to 132 V `0 signal' 0 to 33 V 1) Input current (`1 signal') max. 3 mA Insulation voltage Protective separation provided: - between inputs and outputs Electrical isolation provided: - between input circuits (with respect to one another) Test voltage 1125V AC 1) Or open-circuit input 8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-19 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.5.4 Connector assignment flat connector X1 Binary inputs, terminal block X2 To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components). Terminal 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 Table 8-5 Conductor cross section 8-20 120 V Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference 120 V-input 120 V-Input 120 V-Input 120 V-Input 120 V-Input 120 V-Input 120 V-Input 120 V-Input nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc Channel No. Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB60 The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is 0,2mm, the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.5.5 Block diagram SC50 IT41 IT42 EB11 Fig. 8-8 Block diagram of interface module SB60 8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-21 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.6 Interface module SB61 Order No. 6DD1681-0EB3 Description 8 binary DC signals are adapted to the signal level of SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components, electrically isolated (floating) using the SB61 interface module. Module design * housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails * ribbon cable connector (X1): - 8 pins for binary outputs - 2 pins for 1P, 1M * connector (X2), 2x 12 pin: - 8 terminals for 24 V binary inputs - 8 terminals for 48 V binary inputs - 8 terminals for the reference point * 1 terminal pair X3: 1P,1M (SIMADYN D-side power supply) * 1 terminal pair X4: 2P, 2M (plant/system-side power supply) * plug connector for the short-circuit connector * double test socket X5: 2P (+), 2M (G) * LED displays for diagnostics * optocoupler to provide electrical isolation between the input and output Power supply on the SIMADYN D side The SIMADYN D-side power supply is connected at terminal X3: Terminal X3 Voltage SIMADYN D side 1P +24 V 1M 0V To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0) The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. Green LED The SIMADYN D power supply is indicated using a green LED (P). Red LED The SIMADYN D power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault condition). 8-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.6.1 Signals Power supply, plant/system side The 24/48 V DC voltage for the plant/system side signals is available at terminal block X4: Terminal X4 Voltage, plant/system side 2P +24/48 V 2M 0V To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0). The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. NOTE Test socket To connect the power supply see "User manual FM 458-1 DP" chapter "Installation and EMC guideline". The power supply for the plant/system side is available at double test socket X5 (G; +): Double test socket X5 + G ! WARNUNG (2P from X4) (2M from X4) Voltage, plant/system side +24/48 V 0V Explosion Hazard No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be non-hazardous. Yellow LED The status of the 8 signals is displayed, for each signal, using a yellow LED (1...8). Terminal block for binary signals There are three screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal: * terminals 1 to 8 for 24 V binary signals * terminals 11 to 18 for 48 V binary signals * terminals 51 to 58 as reference point Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-23 8 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.6.2 Application information Plant/system-side signal voltages of 48V or 24V DC can be processed using the interface module. The plant/system side of the module has 8 electrically isolated input channels. Using short-circuit connectors (X11), the connection of each channel can be electrically isolated from one another, or connected to a common reference point: Plant/system side Electricallyisolated inputs (floating) System side X2 Electrical isolation 1/11 51 3 2 X11 Fig. 8-9 P24V/48V 2P M24V/48V 2M 4 1 SB61 X4 Position of the jumpers for inputs which are electrically isolated with respect to one another Plant/system side Inputs with common reference potential System side X2 Electrical isolation 1/11 51 3 2 X11 Fig. 8-10 ! 8-24 CAUTION P24V/48V 2P M24V/48V 2M 4 X4 1 SB61 Position of the jumpers for inputs with common reference potential When supplied, all outputs have a common reference potential, i. e. terminal pair X11 to X18 is equipped with two short-circuit connectors. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules Position of the jumpers The jumpers (short-circuit connectors) are located in the section of the housing cover facing away from the LEDs. These are only accessible after the interface module has been removed. The potential assignment between the plant- and system side is defined as follows: Reference potential of the inputs Position of the short-circuit connector (jumper) Inputs are additionally electricallyisolated with respect to one another Connector X1n1) :2:3 inserted Inputs with common reference potential Connector X1n :1:2 and X1n :3:4 inserted 1) n = number of input 1 to 8 Table 8-6 NOTE Position of the jumpers The potential reference can be separately set for each input. The interface module can only be mounted vertically due to the power loss which has to be dissipated. Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" A typical application is shown in the following diagram: 8 Fig. 8-11 Application example for interface module SB61 at the binary input-, output module EB11 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-25 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.6.3 Technical data General data ambient temperature Mounting system Housing for snapping onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm Weight Approx. 0.32 kg ambient temperature for approbations Power supply max. 50 C SIMADYN D Plant/system side 24 V DC Plant/system side 48 V DC Power supply voltage (VV) 24 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC 20 to 30 V DC 40 to 60 V DC Briefly t<500 ms 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated Current drain at the nominal value 90 mA 50 mA 50 mA The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules. The maximun current on connector X4 is 2 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules. Binary inputs Plant/system side 24 V DC No. 8 Plant/system side 48 V DC 8 Input voltage for `1 signal' `0 signal' Input current (`1signal') 1) 8-26 13 to 30 V DC -3 to +6 V 6 mA 1) 26 to 60 V DC -3 to +12 V 1) 6 mA Or open-circuit input Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.6.4 Connector assignment flat connector X1 Binary inputs, terminal block X2 To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components). Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Table 8-7 Conductor cross section Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Inputs, electrically isolated (floating) +24 V input +24 V input +24 V input +24 V input +24 V input +24 V input +24 V input +24 V input +48 V input +48 V input +48 V input +48 V input +48 V input +48 V input +48 V input +48 V input Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Input 24 V/48 V Inputs with common reference point 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) 2P(+24 V) Channel No. Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 8 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB61 The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is 0,2mm, the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. 8-27 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.6.5 Block diagram X2 X1 11 1 1 51 X11 1 1 2 3 4 18 8 8 58 X18 8 1 2 X4 3 4 1 9 P24 2 10 M24 F X3 1 + P 2 Fig. 8-12 8-28 G Block diagram of interface module SB61 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.7 Interface module SB70 Order No. 6DD1681-0AG2 Description 8 binary output signals from SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC are adapted to the signal level of the plant/system via relays using the SB70 interface module. The output signal voltage can be up to max. 120 V DC or AC. Module design * housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails * ribbon cable connector (X1): - 8 pins for binary inputs - 2 pins for 1P, 1M * connector (X2), 2x 12pin - 8 terminals for the NO contact - 8 terminals for the NC contact - 8 terminals for the center contact * 1 terminal pair X3: 1P,1M (power supply on the SIMADYN D side) * double test socket X5: 1P( + ), 1M ( G ) * LED displays for diagnostic purposes * relay to provide electrical isolation between the input and output * PTC thermistor as cable protection after the SIMADYN D-side power supply Power supply on the SIMADYN D side The SIMADYN D power supply is connected at terminal X3: Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN D side 1P +24 V 1M 0V 8 To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0) The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. NOTE Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 To connect the power supply see "User manual FM 458-1 DP" chapter "Installation and EMC guideline". 8-29 Program memory modules / Interface modules ! WARNUNG Between outputs this interface module have a protective separation The system side ( rack including 24V power supply ) have a protective separation from touch dangerous voltage to the process side ( 8 output signals ). Between outputs they have only an electrical isolation. The output signals on the process side only have an electrically ( galvanically ) isolation between each other. A mix with safety small voltage and touch dangerous voltage is not allowed. Green LED The SIMADYN D-side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P). Red LED The SIMADYN D-side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault condition). Test socket The SIMADYN D power supply is available at the double test socket X5 (G; +): Double test socket X5 Voltage, SIMADYN D side + (1P of X3) +24 V G (1M of X3) 0V 8.7.1 Signals Yellow LED The status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED for each of the signals (1...8). Terminal block for binary signals There are three screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal to the plant/system side: * terminals 14, 24 ... up to 84 for NO contact * terminals 12, 22 ... up to 82 for NC contact * terminals 11, 21 ... up to 81 as center contact The relay contact connections are determined as follows: Quiescent state Connections (screw terminals) Contact closed (NC contact) n2 - n1 1) Contact open (NO contact n4 - n1 1) NOTE 8-30 n: 1...8 depending on the channel No. To connect the power supply see "User manual FM 458-1 DP" chapter "Installation and EMC guideline". Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.7.2 Application information The interface module can be mounted both vertically and horizontally Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section General technical data" A typical application is illustrated in the following diagram: SIMADYN D side Interface module SB70 Plant/system side Fig. 8-13 Application example for interface module SB70 at binary input-, output module EB11 The binary inputs of the interface module are connected to the SIMADYN D outputs via ribbon cables (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables). 8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-31 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.7.3 Technical data General data Power supply Mounting system Housing can be snapped onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm Weight Approx. 0.37 kg Power supply voltage (VV) nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated Current drain at the nominal value 150 mA The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules. Binary outputs No. 8 Switching capability of the relay contacts 120 V AC 2A 120 V DC 0.4 A 60 V DC 1A < 35 V DC 2A Switching frequency max 20 Hz Insulation voltage Protective separation provided: - between inputs and outputs Electrical isolation provided: - between input circuits (with respect to one another) Test voltage 1125V AC 8-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.7.4 Connector assignment flat connector X1 Binary inputs, terminal block X2 To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components). Terminal 120 V Channel No. 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 Center contact Center contact Center contact Center contact Center contact Center contact Center contact Center contact Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact NC contact Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact NO contact Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Table 8-8 Conductor cross section Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB70, terminal block X2 The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is 0,2mm, the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. 8-33 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.7.5 Block diagram X1 X2 11 82 1 11 1 14 82 8 11 8 14 12 14 81 82 84 9 10 F X3 + 1 P 2 Fig. 8-14 8-34 G Block diagram of the SB70 interface module Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.8 Interface module SB71 Order No. 6DD1681-0DH1 Description 8 binary DC signals from the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components system are adapted to the signal level of the plant/system via the SB71 interface module. Module design * Housing which can be snapped-on to mounting rails * Ribbon cable connector (X1): - 8 pins for binary inputs - 2 pins for 1P, 1M * Connector (X2), 2x 8 pin - 8 terminals for binary outputs, 24/48 V DC - 8 terminals for the NC, contacts * 1 terminal pair X3: SIMADYN D) 1P and 1M (power supply on the * 1 terminal pair X4: plant/system side) 2P, 2M (power supply on the * Double test socket X5: 1P(+), 1M(G) * LED displays for diagnostic purposes * Optocoupler to provide electrical isolation between the input and output Power supply on the SIMADYN D side The SIMADYN D power supply is connected at terminal X3: Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN side 1P +24 V 1M 0V 8 To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0) The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. Green LED The SIMADYN D side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P). Red LED The SIMADYN D side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault condition). Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-35 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.8.1 Signals Power supply, plant/system side The 24/48 V DC power supply voltage for the plant/system side signals is connected at terminal block X4: Terminal X4 Voltage, plant/system side 2P +24/48 V 2M 0V To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0) The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. Connectors To connect the power supply to the terminals X3 and X4 use accessory SM11 power supply connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0). The maximum conductor cross section on terminals X3 and X4 is 2,5 mm. Test socket The SIMADYN D power supply is available at the double test socket X5 (G; +): Double test socket X5 ! WARNUNG Voltage, SIMADYN D side + (1P of X3) +24 V G (1M of X3) 0V Explosion Hazard No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be non-hazardous. Yellow LED The status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED for each of these signals (1...8). Terminal block for binary signals There are two screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal: * Terminals 1 to 8 for binary outputs, 24/48 V DC * Terminals 51 to 58 as reference point 8-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.8.2 Application information The interface module has a ribbon cable connector X1 to connect the output signals of the SIMADYN D system (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables), as well as a terminal strip X2 to connect the plant/system signals. The interface module may only be mounted vertically due to the power loss which must be dissipated. Other information ! CAUTION Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section "General technical data"! No more than three binary outputs may be simultaneously short-circuited due to the maximum permissible power loss per interface housing. The following diagram shows a typical application: 8 Fig. 8-15 Application example for interface module SB71 at binary input-, output module EB11 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-37 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.8.3 Technical data General data ambient temperature Mounting system Housing can be snapped onto mounting rails Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm Weight approx. 0.32 kg ambient temperature for approbations Power supply max. 40 C SIMADYN D Power supply voltage (VV) 24 V DC Plant/system side 24 V DC 24 V DC Plant/system side 48 V DC 48 V DC Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 18 V to 60 V DC 18 V to 60 V DC Briefly t<500 ms 1.5 x Urated 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated 300 mA 360 mA Current drain at the 55 mA nominal value The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is th power supply for several interface modules. The maximun current on connector X4 is 2 A, if this is th power supply for several interface modules. Binary outputs System/plant side, 24 V DC No. System/plant side 48 V DC 8 8 for 0 mA output current (VV-0.6 V) (VV-1.2 V) for 20 mA output current (VV-2.1 V) (VV-2.0 V) for 30 mA output current (VV-2.7 V) (VV-2.9 V) Max. output current for 1 signal System/plant side <20,4 V DC 20 mA - Output voltage for 0 signal 0V Output voltage for 1 signal Max. output current (for 1 signal) 1) 8-38 30 mA 0V 1) 30 mA 2) The binary outputs are continuously short-circuit proof. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.8.4 Connector assignment flat connector X1 Binary outputs, terminal strip X2 To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components). Terminal Designation 1 Binary output 1 2 Binary output 2 3 Binary output 3 4 Binary output 4 5 Binary output 5 6 Binary output 6 7 Binary output 7 8 Binary output 8 51 0 V, binary output 1 52 0 V, binary output 2 53 0 V, binary output 3 54 0 V, binary output 4 55 0 V, binary output 5 56 0 V, binary output 6 57 0 V, binary output 7 58 0 V, binary output 8 Table 8-9 Conductor cross section Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Assignment of binary outputs of interface module SB71 8 The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is 0,2mm, the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm. 8-39 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.8.5 Block diagram X2 X1 1 51 1 1 8 58 8 10 8 9 X4 2P P24/48 2M M24/48 X3 F 1P 1M Fig. 8-16 8-40 + P G Block diagram of the SB71 interface module Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 Order No. SU10 SU11 SU12 SU13 6DD1681-0FG0 6DD1681-0EA1 6DD1681-0AJ1 6DD1681-0GK0 General SU10 SU11 SU12 SU13 The interface module SU10 is a The interface module SU11 is a The interface module SU12 is a The interface module SU12 is a 26-pin terminal block. This is used to code analog or binary signals of a 20-pin terminal block. This is used to code analog or binary signals of a 10-pin terminal block. This is used to code analog or binary signals of a 10-pin terminal block. This is used to code 50 signals of a 26 pin ribbon cable connector (SIMADYN D side) on screw/plug-in terminals (plant/system side). 20 pin ribbon cable connector (SIMADYN D side) on screw/plug-in terminals (plant/system side). 10 pin ribbon cable connector (SIMADYN D side) on screw/plug-in terminals (plant/system side). Module design SU10 50pin sub-D socket connector (SIMADYN D side) on screw/plug-in terminals (plant/system side). 26 screw/plug-in terminals (X2) * 25 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or binary signals * 1 unassigned screw terminal connection 26 core ribbon cable X1 SU11 24 screw/plug-in terminals (X2) * 20 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or binary signals * 4 unassigned screw terminal connections 20 core ribbon cable for connector X1 SU12 8 16 screw/plug-in terminals (X2) * 10 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or binary signals * 6 unassigned screw terminal connections 10 core ribbon cable for connector X1. ribbon cable, 10-core SIMADYN D-side analog- and binary signals SU13 50 screw/plug-in terminals (X2) * 50 signals are connected * no electronic conversion 50 core screened round cable for connector X1. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-41 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.9.1 Function description A 1:1 connection from the SIMADYN D-side ribbon cable connector X1 to the plant/system-side screw terminal block X2 is established by using the interface modules SU10 and SU11. A 1:1 connection from the SIMADYN D-side connector X1 to the plant/system-side spring-cage terminal block X2 is not established for all signals by using the interface modules SU12 and SU13. The following terminals have a fuse (0,5A slow-blow, internal resistance 0,25) in the following signal lines: Interface modules Terminal block X2 SU12 pin 1 - 8 SU13 pin 8, 17 - 23, 26 - 33, 36 - 43, 46 - 48 The following terminals have a protection diode ( Schottky- diode, BAT46 by Vishay) for the 24V power supply of the binary outputs in the following signal lines: Interface modules Terminal block X2 SU12 pin 10 SU13 pin 10 The following terminals have a ptc resistor (internal resistance 0,9, e.g. B59910-C120-A70 by Epcos) as short circuit protection for the 24V power supply of the binary outputs in the following signal lines: Process signals Interface modules Terminal block X2 SU12 pin 9 SU13 pin 9 The interface modules are designed so that signals can flow from both sides. The process signals are coded without any additional electrical isolation and signal processing. Voltage range The maximum allowable voltages of the modules, on which the interface modules are connected, are to comply. Current range max. 0.5 A Table 8-10 8-42 Maximum permissible voltage- and current values for signal processing Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.9.2 Supplementary components Cables for SU10 The following cables are required to connect the interface modules to the modules: Cable Module Plug connector SC49 IT41 X6/X7 IT42 X8 SC50 IT42 X6 SC51 IT42 X7 Table 8-11 SU11 Cable Module Plug connector SC55 EB11 X5 SC55 EB11 X6 SC12 EA12 X6 Table 8-12 SU12 Module Plug connector SC54 IT41 X6, X7 IT42 X8 SC13 EB11 X5, X6 SC7 PM5 X5 PM6 X5 SC64 FM458-1 DP X2 SC62 EXM438-1 X3 8 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU12 Leitungstyp Baugruppen Steckverbinder SC63 EXM 438-1 X1, X2, X3 Table 8-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU11 Cable Table 8-13 SU13 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU10 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU13 8-43 Program memory modules / Interface modules 8.9.3 Application information The interface modules can be mounted vertically and horizontally. They are snapped onto a mounting rail, . Other information Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section, General technical data" 8.9.4 Pin/terminal assignment X1/X2 The screw terminal numbers of X2 are identical with the ribbon cable connector numbering corresponding to the pin arrangement. Conductor cross section Interfacemodule Minimum conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 Maximum conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 SU10, SU11, SU12 0,2 mm 2,5 mm. SU13 0,2 mm 1,5 mm. SU10 X1 1 1 2 2 3 3 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 NC Fig. 8-17 8-44 X2 Circuit diagram, SU10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 Program memory modules / Interface modules SU11 X1 X2 1 1 2 2 3 3 19 19 20 20 NC NC NC NC Fig. 8-18 SU12 Circuit diagram, SU11 X1 X2 1 1 2 2 8 9 8 PTC 10 9 8 10 NC NC NC N C NC NC Fig. 8-19 Circuit diagram, SU12 The components are described in chapter 8.9.1. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 8-45 Program memory modules / Interface modules SU13 X1 X2 X1 X2 1 1 26 26 8 33 33 9 34 34 10 10 35 35 11 11 36 36 16 16 43 43 17 17 44 44 45 45 8 9 PTC 23 23 46 46 24 24 47 47 25 25 48 48 49 49 50 50 Fig. 8-20 Circuit diagram, SU13 The components are described in chapter 8.9.1. 8.9.5 Technical data General data Ambient temperature 8-46 Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm Weight Approx. 0.28 kg ambient temperature for approbations for interface modules The maximum allowable ambient temperatures of the modules, on which the interface modules are connected, are to comply. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 04.2011 9 Plug-in cables Overview 9.1 General information 9-2 9.2 Cable types 9-4 9 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-1 Plug-in cables 9.1 General information Description The ribbon- and round cables are used to connect the following components: * CPU modules to interface modules * input/output- and expansion modules with interface modules * ITDC expansion module with SITOR thyristor sets General technical data Insulation group According to VDE 0110, degree of pollution 2 Permissible operating peak voltage 300 V, conductor with respect to ground Permissible operating voltage 32 V, conductor to conductor Max. current per cable 1A Max. resistance 220 Ohm/km Cable width (ribbon cable) Core number x 1.27 mm Table 9-1 General technical data 9-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 Plug-in cables Cable overview with connection possibilities Module Connec tor Cable Partial connector designation Cable conversion Interface module which can be connected IT41 X6 SC49 A B A B C D E A B A B C D E 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10 SU10 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12 SU10 SU10 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12 SU10 SU10 SU10 SU10 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12 SU11 SU11 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU11 SU11 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61 SU11 SU12 SITOR interface SITOR interface Monitor/diagnostics PC Monitor/diagnostics PC SC54 IT41 X7 SC49 SC54 IT42 IT42 IT42 X6 X7 X8 SC50 SC51 SC49 SC54 EB11 X5 SC55 SC13 EB11 X6 SC55 SC13 EA12 PM5/6 ITDC ITDC PM5/6 SS4 X6 X5 X7 X7 X4 X5 SC12 SC7 SC17.2 SC31.2 SC57 SC57 A B A B C D E A B A B C D A B A B C D 50 pin to 5*10 pin 50 pin to 2*26 pin 50 pin to 5*10 pin 15 pin to 26 pin. 25 pin to 26 pin. 50 pin to 2*26 pin 50 pin to 5*10 pin 40 pin to 2*20 pin 40 pin to 4*10 pin 40 pin to 2*20 pin 40 pin to 4*10 pin 20 pin to 20 pin. 10 pin to 10 pin. 50 pin to 50 pin. 50 pin to 50 pin. 9 Table 9-2 Modules and the interface modules which can be connected Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-3 Plug-in cables 9.2 SC7 Cable types Ribbon cable SC7 10 pin Application Connects the 10-pin connector strip of a CPU module with the 10-pin plug connector strip of an interface module. Features Unscreened ribbon cable 2 socket connectors, 10 pin (1:1) connection, can be inserted from any direction Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief at both ends. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0AH0 Table 9-3 Ribbon cable SC7 SC12 Ribbon cable SC12 20 pin, twisted pairs Application Connects the 20 pin plug connector of an input/output module with the 20 pin plug connector of an interface module. Features * unscreened ribbon cable * twisted pairs * two 20-pin socket connectors * (1:1) connection Cable ends * can be inserted from any direction Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief at both ends. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0BC0 Table 9-4 Ribbon cable SC12 9-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 Plug-in cables SC13 Ribbon cable SC13 40 pin / 4 x 10 pin Application Connects the 40-pin plug connector of an input/output module with the 10-pin plug connectors of four interface modules. Features * unscreened ribbon cable * one 40-pin socket connector * Cable ends four 10-pin socket connectors with partial connector labeling, A to D and the assignment A: Pins 1 to 10 B: Pins 11 to 20 C: Pins 21 to 30 D: Pins 31 to 40 of the 40-pin socket connector Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief at both ends. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0BD0 Table 9-5 Ribbon cable SC13 t Connector marking 20 21 30 31 40 D C 11 B 10 A 1 17,3 l 9 Color coding 1. core 55,6 Fig. 9-1 Ribbon cable SC13 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-5 Plug-in cables SC17.2 Ribbon cable SC17.2 50 pin Application Connects the SITOR interface of an expansion module with the SITOR interface of a SITOR thyristor set or an SE20.2 interface module. Features * screened round cable * twisted pairs * 50-pin SUB-D plug connector * 50-pin SUB-D socket connector Cable ends * (1:1) connection SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are provided at both ends Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0BH2 Table 9-6 Ribbon cable SC17.2 SC31.2 Ribbon cable SC31.2 50 pin Application Connects the SITOR interface of an expansion module with the SITOR interface of a SITOR thyristor set or an SE20.2 interface module. Features * screened round cable * twisted pairs * 50-pin SUB-D plug connector * 50 pin SUB-D socket connector Cable ends * (1:1) connection SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are provided at both ends Length 10 m Order No. 6DD1684-0DB2 Table 9-7 Ribbon cable SC31.2 9-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 Plug-in cables SC49 Round cable SC49 50 pin / 2 x 26 pin Application Connects the 50-pin SUB-D socket connector of an expansion module with the 26-pin plug connectors of 2 interface modules. Features * screened round cable * 50-pin SUB-D plug connector * two 26-pin socket connectors with partial connector labeling A and B with the assignment A: Pins 1 to 25 B: Pins 26 to 50 of the 50-core ribbon cable Expansion board: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN 41652 Cable ends Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651 with strain relief. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0EK0 Table 9-8 Ribbon cable SC49 4 A ed l glu Labe 1) ble e ca o n th A Shrinking tubing ca. 50 1 B 2 3 Shrin king tu bing B 9 2000 +/- 15 Fig. 9-2 Ribbon cable SC49 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-7 Plug-in cables SC50 Round cable SC50 15 pin / 26 pin Application Connects the 15-pin SUB-D socket connector of an expansion module with the 26-pin plug connector of an interface module. Features * * * * Cable ends screened round cable 15-pin SUB-D plug connector 26-pin socket connector (1:1) connection, pins 16 to 26 of the socket connector are not assigned Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN 41652 Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651 with strain relief. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0FA0 Table 9-9 Ribbon cable SC50 1 4 2 3 1 Shrinking tubing 26 1) 2000 +/- 0,1 Fig. 9-3 Ribbon cable SC50 9-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 Plug-in cables SC51 Round cable SC51 25 pin / 26 pin Application Connects the 25 pin SUB-D socket connector of an expansion module with the 26-pin plug connector of an interface module. Features * screened round cable * 25-pin SUB-D plug connector * 26-pin socket connector * Cable ends (1:1) connection, pin 26 of the socket connector not assigned Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN 41652 Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651 with strain relief. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0FB0 Table 9-10 Ribbon cable SC51 1 4 2 3 Shrinking tubing 1) 2000 +/- 15 Fig. 9-4 Ribbon cable SC51 9 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-9 Plug-in cables SC54 Round cable SC54 50 pin / 5 x 10 pin Application Connects the 50-pin SUB-D socket connector of an expansion module with the 10-pin plug connectors of 5 interface modules. Features * screened round cable * 50-pin SUB-D plug connector * 5, 10-pin socket connectors with printed partial connector designations A to E with the assignment A: Pins 1 to 10 B: Pins 11 to 20 C: Pins 21 to 30 D: Pins 31 to 40 E: Pins 41 to 50 of the 50-pin plug connector Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN 41652 Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651 with strain relief. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0FE0 Table 9-11 Ribbon cable SC54 A Shrinking tubing A B 1) Shrinking tubing B C C ca. 50 D 1 2 D 3 E 4 Shrinking tubing E 2000 +/- 15 Fig. 9-5 Ribbon cable SC54 9-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 Plug-in cables Sub-D connector 1 34 18 2 35 19 3 36 20 4 37 21 5 38 22 6 39 23 7 40 24 8 41 25 9 42 26 10 43 27 Plug connector Partial connect. A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Partial connect. B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Partial connect. C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Sub-D connector 11 44 28 12 45 29 13 46 30 14 47 31 15 48 32 16 49 33 17 50 Socket connector Partial connector D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Partial connector E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Table 9-12 Ribbon cable SC54 9 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-11 Plug-in cables SC55 Ribbon cable SC55 40 pin / 2 x 20 pin Application Connects the 40-pin plug connector of an input/output module with the 20-pin plug connectors of two interface modules. Features * unscreened ribbon cable * 1, 40-pin socket connector * 2, 20-pin socket connectors with partial connector Cable ends designations A and B with the assignment A: Pins 1 to 20 B: Pins 21 to 40 of the 40-pin socket connector Connectors according to DIN 41651 with tension relief at both ends. Length 2m Order No. 6DD1684-0FF0 Table 9-13 Ribbon cable SC55 1 3 2) 2 A stamped on acc. to DIN 30640 A6 -sw B 1) 2000 +/- 15 Fig. 9-6 Ribbon cable SC55 9-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 Plug-in cables SC57 Round cable SC57 9 pin / 9 pin with 9-pin to 26-pin adapter Application Connects a PC (COM 1 / 2, RS 232) with the serial interface of a CPU module with cable 1, 10m or a SS4 communications module (on CS7) with cable 1 and 2 (adapter), 10m + 0.5m Features * screened round cable * twisted pairs * 26-pin SUB-D plug connector Cable ends * 9-pin SUB-D socket connector SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are located at both ends Length 10 m, with adapter 0.5 m Order No. 6DD1684-0FH0 Table 9-14 Ribbon cable SC57 SC57 adapter for CS7/SS4 Part 2 500 1 2 3 4 Contact assignment 5 9-pin socket 6 7 8 X4 X3 9 PM 1 10 9 18 19 26 26-pin plug connector. SS4 3 Tinned 35 Cable ends aligned Item 6 Halve the rubber gasket (S.-N.:087650) and insert both parts above one another over the cable 3 PM SS4 7 Leave 9mm screen and fold back over the sheath. Remove the transparent foil 1) 35 Tinned Item 7 Shrink tubing (fold the screen back over the sheath) 8 9 2 9 1) 1 1 26 1 3) 2 5 2) Label 2 4 1 1) Mounting position taken into account 2) Label glued on 3) Screw-in the screws provided into the housing 3) Fig. 9-7 Ribbon cable SC57 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 9-13 Plug-in cables SC57 cables 1 and 2 SUB-D, 9-POHLIG STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG: PC (Com 1) SUB-D, 9-pin connector marking PC (Com 1) Part 1 RUNDKABEL, GESCHIRMT round cable, screened SUB-D, 9-POLIG STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG: PM SUB-D, 9-pin connector marking PM -X2 -X1 2 3 3 2 5 5 SUB-D, 9-POLIG STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG: PM SUB-D, 9-pin connector marking PM -X3 Part 2 RUNDKABEL, GESCHIRMT round cable, screened SUB-D, 26-POLIG STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG: SS4 SUB-D, 26-pin connector marking SS4 -X4 3 4 2 16 5 9 Fig. 9-8 Ribbon cable SC57 9-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 06.2002 10 Operator control panel OP2 Overview 10.1 Function overview 10-2 10.2 Process data handling 10-3 10.3 Binary value processing 10-5 10.4 System operation 10-10 10.5 System run-up 10-18 10.6 Handling OP2 errors 10-20 10.7 Front panel 10-24 10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting 10-25 10.9 Battery change 10-26 10.10 Connecting elements 10-26 10.11 Power supply 10-27 10.12 Baud rates 10-27 10.13 Cables and connectors 10-27 10.14 Using a printer with OP2 10-29 10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips 10-30 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-1 Operator control panel OP2 10.1 Function overview The OP 2 is an operator control device for the SIMADYN D system. It offers the following functionality: MSG Process data handling Displays and processes up to 24 process data. 2 process data are always displayed. BIN Binary value processing Displays and processes up to 32 binary values MSG Message system Autonomous message system for P32 messages from SIMADYN D. Messages are saved, sorted according to the time they were received, and can be deleted. Only one message is displayed at any one time (max. 80 characters). SYS MSG System message Messages which come directly from OP2 System operation SYSTEM Changing and saving the basic function SIEMENS SIMADYN OP 2 Two-line display 40 characters per line MSG BIN VAL PRN B1 V1 V2 V3 1 2 3 DEL B2 V4 V5 V6 4 5 6 ACT B3 V7 V8 V9 7 8 9 OLD B4 V10 V11 V12 0 , +/- SEL SHIFT DIM CHG SYS MSG EPROM SYSTEM Enter Process data panels V1...V12 Numerical pad Binary value keys B1..B4 10-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.2 Process data handling VAL key 10.2.1 Process data handling is selected using the VAL key. The LED in the key is lit if process data handling has been selected (the VAL key). General information Two of a total of 24 process data can be simultaneously displayed (upper and lower display line). The 24 values are sub-divided into two panels (V1..V12 + SHIFT) for easier selection. Process data The sub-division of the two panels according to setpoints and actual values can be configured as required (for instance, 20 actual values can be configured or just 3). The sub-division according to setpoints and actual values is exclusively configured in SIMADYN D. The selected process data values are always displayed normalized, in accordance with the pre-setting (default) together with dimension and name. If a name has not been configured, then the VALUE xy" (xy = 1 ..24) designator is displayed as default value. If a non-configured process data is selected, then operating message No. 14 (NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED") is displayed. This text is displayed for 3 seconds, and then the previous value is re-displayed. ACCESS = -0.123456789012345 Rev/min VALUE 24 = -17.365195745 E-55 POUNDS Designator 10.2.2 Value Dimensions % data Behavior at run-up The OP2 automatically goes into the process data handling mode after it has been initialized. The last selected values are displayed again. At first run-up, the first two configured values are displayed (normally V1 and V2). If only one process data has been configured, then operating message No. 14 is displayed in the lower display line (NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED"). If no process data have been configured at the SIMADYN D side, the OP2 goes into the basic message system processing function. If process data handling is selected at a later time, then operating message No. 14 is displayed in the upper line (NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED"). The text is displayed until another basic function is selected. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-3 10 Operator control panel OP2 10.2.3 VAL SEL Operator control overview for process data handling VAL: - SEL: - Displays process data The two last selected process data are displayed (Default: VALUE V1 and V2) Selects process data The select functions V1...V12/SHFT/DIM are activated The designator in the active display line flashes The active display line changes if the key is again depressed SHIFT V1 ... DIM V2 Selects process data V1...V12: Measured value 1...24 SHIFT: Toggles between the process data panels LED dark: V1...V12 LED lit: V13...V24 DIM: Toggling the representation type between values with dimension and value as a percentage CHG CHG: - Changes setpoints The change mode for the selected process data is enabled A change currently being made is cancelled Operating message No. 5 "SETPOINT CHANGE INHIBITED", if an ACTUAL VALUE was selected (configured) Numerical keypad Decrease value Increase value Changing a value using the continuous change keys and TIP operation Entering a new value Correction backspace key Toggling between mantisse and exponent for floating-point number Cursor position Cursor position Enter Entering a new value Terminate and transfer the change EPROM E2 PROM: Saving changes in the SIMADYN D EPROM - Enter Activate the memory function The LED flashes until the function has been completed with Enter Operating message No. 35 "SAVE EPROM UNSUCCESSFUL". A value Value transfer is not accepted if there is an error condition Running functions are CANCELED SYSTEM SYS MSG MSG BIN VAL Return to display operation 10-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.3 Binary value processing Overview SIEMENS SIMADYN OP 2 Two-line display Processing the binary value menus (bin. values 5.32) Processing binary KEYS B1...B4 (bin. values 1...4) 40 characters per line MSG BIN VAL PRN B1 V1 V2 V3 1 2 3 DEL B2 V4 V5 V6 4 5 6 ACT B3 V7 V8 V9 7 8 9 OLD B4 V10 V11 V12 0 , +/- SEL SHIFT DIM CHG EPROM SYS MSG SYSTEM Enter Up to 32 binary values can be processed. (BIN and B1..B4). The binary values cannot be saved in the SIMADYN D EPROM. If this is required, then the binary values should be configured as process data in SIMADYN D. Binary values are processed using two mechanisms: Binary keys B1 - B4 Keys B1 - B4 can always be selected, unless system processing has been selected (SYSTEM). The LED in the four binary keys indicates whether the appropriate binary value is 0" (LED is dark) or 1" (LED is lit). The status is inverted when depressed. Each time the KEY is depressed, the LED flashes until SIMADYN D acknowledges the change. If the binary values were not configured on the SIMADYN D side, then the LEDs in keys B1 to B4 remain dark (i. e. the keys have no effect). 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-5 Operator control panel OP2 Binary value processing Starts the binary value menu / binary values B5 to B32 are processed. BIN Name (can be configured in SIMADYN D) default name: SIGNAL No. SIGNAL9 SIGNAL10 SIGNAL11 SIGNAL12 0 FULL OFF Enter Change 0/1 changeover ---- Select the next or previous binary value Status display: - as display 0/1 - as text alternative (configurable text) - ----if not configured The status display flashes after each action until SIMADYN D acknowledges the change. Running functions are cancelled SYSTEM SYS MSG MSG VAL BIN No function 10.3.1 Message system processing The OP2 combines all of the incoming messages into its own message system which can administer up to 30 messages (save). If more messages are received, then the first messages are overwritten (ring buffer mechanism) and an overflow message is entered into the buffer. Operating message No. 15 (NUMBER OF LOST MESSAGES: xx"), xx specifies the number of messages which have been overwritten. Only one message can be displayed at any one time. OP2 sorts all of the received messages into chronological order. Evaluating the message class areas An OP2 does not have to administer all messages, transmitted from SIMADYN D. Message classes are allocated, which are specified when parameterizing the OP2, which are then used as selection criterion as to which messages should be administered by OP2. All messages can be permitted, or 1, 2 or 3 message class areas. The message classes are defined in SIMADYN D when configuring the message system (refer to the system software and configuring D7-SYS; message class = prefix). Operator control overview for message processing The message system processing is selected via the MSG key. After being selected, the key LED is lit (bright). If OP2 hasn't received any messages, then after selection, operating message No. 16 is displayed (NO MESSAGES AVAILABLE"). The text remains until either a message is received, or another function is selected (e. g. VAL key). If the OP2 has received new messages from SIMADYN D (since the last time that message system processing was selected), then the MSG-key LED flashes if the message system processing is not selected. When the message system processing is re-selected, the last selected message is displayed again. When the key is repeatedly depressed, the latest message is displayed. You can scroll through the selected OP2 message system using the raise/lower keys. 10-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 The sequence for depressing the various keys for all functions in the message processing are now listed. OP2 rejects illegal key combinations with an appropriate message. MSG: Selecting the message system processing VAL - the message operation is re-selected (displays the last selected message) jumps to the latest message DELETE ACT + DEL ACT + DEL: Deletes the currently displayed message OLD PRINT + DEL OLD OLD + DEL: Deletes all old messages including the currently displayed message + PRN ACT + DEL: Prints the currently displayed message ACT + PRN OLD + DEL: Prints all old messages including the currently displayed message Selects the next most recent or next oldest message Running functions are cancelled SYSTEM SYS MSG BIN VAL MSG Jump to the latest message 10.3.2 Message on the display Messages on the display OP2 displays messages in two different message formats. The two message formats are: * ASCII-text messages: They consist of: Date/time, message type, message text and process data/dimensions * Prefix/suffix messages: They consist of: Date/time, message type, prefix, suffix and process data/dimension Date/time consist of day, month, year, hour, minute, seconds and milliseconds. Message types: Warning, fault, communications error and system error. The syntax/representation types of the message system must be used. Process data/dimensions are optional information in a message and are exclusively dependent on the software configured in SIMADYN D. The configuring engineer decides, on the SIMADYN D side, which format is displayed, when configuring the message system. Further information is provided in the User Documentation for the SIMADYN D system software and configuring D7-SYS. The OP2 displays the messages configured in SIMADYN D as follows: Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-7 10 Operator control panel OP2 Possible message formats ASCII text message Prefix/suffix Text Evaluation and display on the OP2 no no Message is not administered. yes no The prefix is evaluated as message class. If the message class is permissible, the message is administered (stored) in the prefix/suffix format. no yes Messages without prefix/suffix, with text, are always administered in the OP2. yes yes Prefix is evaluated as message class. If it is valid, the message is administered (stored) in the text format. If process data (with dimensions) is included in a message, then the OP2 cuts" the message text after 28 characters if it is longer (independent as to whether a dimension is available or not). The message text may be up to 56 characters long if there is no process data. If the message text is shorter than the maximum length, then the remaining characters are filled with blanks"; i. e. the display stays dark" at these positions. Thus, the following message format is provided at the display (2x40 characters) (d=day, m=month or minutes, y=year, h=hours, z=milliseconds, T=message type (warning, fault etc.): 1) Message with process data (and dimension): Max. 28 message characters dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T A MAX. OF 28 CHARACTERS ARE HERE!!-999.12345678 E+99 DIMENSION 2) Message without process data: Max. 56 message characters dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T A MAX. OF 56 CHARACTERS COME FROM SIMADYN D!!!! Example for a message in the ASCII text format with measured value (without dimension): 01.10.94 00:00:05:167 W THE MOTOR RUNS WITH UE CURRENT -99999.1234567 E+99 Prefix/suffix message For the prefix/suffix" format, the following message formats can be displayed on the OP2 display (d=day, m=month or minute, y=year, h=hour, z=milliseconds, T=message type (warning, fault etc.): 1) Message with process data (and dimension): dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T P:54321 S:54321 -999.12345678 E+99 DIMENSION 2) Message without process data: dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T P54321 S:54321 10.3.3 Message print-out The OP2 defines the message format at the printer, so that 2 display lines (i. e. a complete message) are combined to form a printer line. OP2 automatically inserts a line break after each message. A message is therefore always 80 characters long; the character length at the printer should be appropriately set. OP2 does not change the message structure. 10-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 Characters 1-40 Characters 41-80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11.10.94 20:13:44:571 W MOTOR No . 4 HAS SPEED: -999.121234567E+01 RPM Print control The user can print-out all of the acquired messages using the PRINT/OLD or PRINT/ACT keys (the two keys should be simultaneously depressed). For OLD/PRINT, all of the messages including the presently displayed message, are printed. For ACT/PRINT, that message is printed, which is being currently displayed. Deleting messages The messages are not automatically deleted after having been printed. Messages are printed using the DEL key. Automatic printing When parameterizing OP2, it should be specified as to whether messages should be printed immediately after they have been received in the OP2 (refer to "Parameterizing for the message system processing") If YES is entered, then the messages are printed-out immediately after the message telegram has been received. With this type of print-out, there is no guarantee that the messages are printed-out in the correct chronological sequence. 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-9 Operator control panel OP2 10.4 System operation In system operation, the basic settings (operating parameters) for the OP2 are defined. The settings are permanently saved in the OP2 flash memory. Selection Depress the SYSTEM key for longer than 3 sec. SYSTEM 10.4.1 Function overview The following menu appears in system operation: MESSAGE PRINTER VALUE END USS-INTERFACE DISPLAY-OPTIONS Operator control CURSOR Select the function 10-10 Enter Start the function Function Definition MESSAGE Parameterization for message system processing VALUE Parameterization for process data processing USS-INTERFACE Parameterizing the USS interface to SIMADYN D PRINTER Parameterizing the printer interface DISPLAY-OPTIONS Selecting the language for all OP2 messages Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.4.2 Parameterizing the message system processing Message MESSAGE VALUE PRINTER END Enter Message Class USS-INTERFACE DISPLAY-OPTIONS CURSOR Function selection Description: The message class areas, which can be configured as prefix, are specified, which are accepted from OP2 - Input 0 in area 1 deletes all entries. All messages are accepted from the BUS - Selecting a displayed message is realized as for example, area 2 Display: (example) MESSAGE CLASS 1-100 Area 1 Enter 150-150 Area 2 Transfer MESSAGE 12000-15000 0000 Area 3 Default "ALL" CURSOR Value selection Nuermical keypad Value input Print Message Description: If the parameter is set to YES, all of the thre received messages are immediately output via the printer interface Display: PRINT MESSAGE DIRECTLY YES Enter Transfer MESSAGE NO YES CURSOR Value selection 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-11 Operator control panel OP2 10.4.3 Parameterizing for process data VALUE MESSAGE PRINTER Enter Host Response Time VALUE USS-INTERFACE END DISPLAY-OPTIONS CURSOR Selects the function Description: SIMADYN D response time when acknowledging process data changes (HOST RESPONSE TIME) Display: HOST RESPONSE TIME (SEC) 10 Enter VALUE 1...10 Transfer Numerical keypad Value input Change Frequency Description: Repeat cycle (ms) for setting the value using the raise/lower keys. Display: CHANGE FREQUENCY (MS) 200 Enter VALUE 100...500 Transfer Numerical keypad Value input Change Delay Description: Delay time (ms) between depressing the key until the action is repeated. Display: CHANGE DELAY (MS) VALUE 800 Enter 100...800 Transfer Numerical keypad Value input 10-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.4.4 Parameterizing for the USS interface USS-Interface MESSAGE PRINTER VALUE USS-INTERFACE END DISPLAY-OPTIONS Enter Station-Address CURSOR Function selection Description: Node number (station address) The node number (station address) on the USS bus is defined using this parameter. If a node number (station address) is not entered, then the device does not establish a connection to SIMADYN D. Display: STATION-ADDRESS USS-INTERFACE 7 0..31 Area 1 Enter Transfer Numerical keypad Value input Baudrate Description: Baud rate of the USS bus Display: BAUDRATE (KBAUD) 9,6 Enter Delay Time USS-INTERFACE 9, 6 19, 2 93, 75 187, 5 CURSOR Function selection Transfer Description: Cycle time monitoring of the USS MASTER Display: DELAY-TIME (ms) USS-INTERFACE 100 Enter 0...100 Transfer Numerical keypad Value input 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-13 Operator control panel OP2 10.4.5 Parameterization for the printer PRINTER MESSAGE VALUE PRINTER END USS-INTERFACE DISPLAY-OPTIONS Enter CURSOR Function selection Baud rate Description: Baud rate for the printer interface: Display: BAUDRATE (KBAUD) PRINTER 9, 6 Enter Data bits 2, 4 4, 8 9, 6 Transfer CURSOR Function selection Description: Character format, data bits (DATA BITS): Display: DATABITS PRINTER 8 7 8 Enter Parity Transfer CURSOR Function selection Description: Character format, parity (PARITY): Display: PARITY EVEN Enter Stop bits Transfer PRINTER EVEN ODD CURSOR Function selection Description: Character format, stop bits (STOP BITS) Display: STOP BITS PRINTER 2 Enter LINE TYPE Transfer CURSOR Function selection Description: Toggling the printer INTERFACE between a TTYand V24 connection Display: LINE TYPE PRINTER TTY V24 TTY Enter 10-14 1 2 Transfer CURSOR Function selection Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.4.6 End of system operation SYSTEM operation is terminated by selecting END and depressing the ENTER key. END MESSAGE VALUE PRINTER END USS-INTERFACE DISPLAY-OPTIONS Enter CURSOR Function selection END Description: If the BUS has to be re-initialized to SIMADYN D, "YES" should be entered, otherwise, "NO". Display: INIT REQUEST YES Enter 10.4.7 YES NO CURSOR Function selection Transfer Parameterizing the display options PRINTER MESSAGE VALUE PRINTER END USS-INTERFACE DISPLAY-OPTIONS Enter CURSOR Function selection Languages Description: Selects the OP2 system message languages (the menu language in "SYSTEM operation" is always English). D = German, I = Italian, F =French, E = Spanish Display (Example): LANGUAGE DISPLAY-OPTIONS D ENGLISH Enter CONTRAST D I F E CURSOR Function selection Transfer Description: CONTRAST display setting Display: CONTRAST DISPLAY-OPTIONS 1 Enter 10 0...15 Transfer Numerical keypad Value input 10.4.8 Self-test The user can test all of the OP2 sub-components using the self-test. The self-test function can only be accessed from system operation. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-15 Operator control panel OP2 Starting the selftest System operation is selected by depressing the SYSTEM key (longer than 3 seconds). The self-test is started by simultaneously depressing the keys. The particular function is selected using the cursor keys and acknowledged with ENTER. The test menu is displayed: DISPLAY USS-INTERFACE PRINTER-INTERFACE END KEYBOARD HARDWARE DISPLAY TEST Various test patterns are continuously written into the display. Display errors can be identified by visually checking these optical patterns on the screen. The test is terminated with ENTER. USS INTERFACE TEST Cyclic data are transmitted via the USS bus, and they are simultaneously received and checked. The USS interface can be checked using a shortcircuit plug connector. During the test, the following message is shown on the upper display line: USS-INTERFACE TEST -> ENTER FOR END". After the test has been terminated, the following message is indicated on the lower display line: USS-INTERFACE OK" or USS-INTERFACE ERROR" (the test is terminated with ENTER). The short-circuit plug-connector assignment is: 5 9 PRINTER INTERFACE TEST 1 P IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 RS 485 S e lb s ttes t D a ta P GND +5V T xD + R xD + G sN D +5V D a ta N T xD R xD - A test telegram is output at the printer via the printer port. The printer port can be checked using a short-circuit plug connector. The test is terminated with ENTER. Assignment of the short-circuit plug connector: Port assignment SS 1 and SS 2 A 8 15 1 9 PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 General Screen V.24 TTY RxD- RxD TxD CTS TxD+ TxDScreen RxD+ RTS GND +20mA GND +20mA +5V GND The test is terminated with ENTER. 10-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 Hardware The OP2 tests the internal memory. The OP2 shows the operating status in the upper display line RAM-EPROM-FLASH-TEST". The actual test step is displayed in the lower line. When errors occur, OP2 stays at that particular test step and issues the message TEST ERROR". If no errors are detected, OP2 returns to the self-test menu after the test has been completed. The test takes approximately two minutes. Message texts during testing: WRITE READ TEST OF RAM CALCULATE CHECK SUM OF EPROM WRITE READ TEST OF FLASH END End of the self test and the OP2 returns to the SYSTEM mode. 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-17 Operator control panel OP2 10.5 System run-up OP2 is powered-up by switching-on the +24V power supply voltage. All of the connections must be correct to ensure perfect functioning of the unit: Power-on * USS connecting cable to SIMADYN D * printer cable (if a printer is connected). * power supply cable After being powered-up, the OP2 Version V1.0" message is displayed for approximately 5 seconds (the actual firmware version is displayed). Hardware test OP2 then goes into an automatic hardware test routine. The following messages occur one after the another during this test routine: EPROM ok Error EPROM -memory failure (OP2 defect/replace) RAM ok Error RAM-memory failure (OP2 defect/replace) FLASH-TEST Error FLASH-memory failure (OP2 defect/replace) Error FLASH-memory erased Error FLASH-memory chsum wrong - incorrect contents/checksum of the FLASH memory - FLASH is re-initialized FLASH-TEST --- - run-up with DEFAULT initialization TEST ok The OP2 then automatically establishes a communications link to SIMADYN D. 10.5.1 Establishing a communications link to SIMADYN D After a successful self-test, OP2 establishes a communications link to the SIMADYN D subracks. This procedure can either be initiated by SIMADYN D or by the OP2. This is realized as follows * SIMADYN D: After resetting or powering-up the subrack power supply. * OP2: After powering-up the OP2 power supply voltage or, optionally, when exiting the SYSTEM mode (for menu item INIT REQUEST" in the main menu END"). Establishing the communications link 10-18 When OP2 starts to establish the link, the following message is displayed INITIALIZATION REQUESTED" (upper display line). After the first data have been exchanged with SIMADYN D, the process values are automatically initialized (message in the lower display line: PROCESS DATA INITIALIZATION") and then the binary value initialization (message in the lower display line: BINARY VALUE INITIALIZATION"). Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 If all of the initialization data have been completely loaded into the OP2, OP2 automatically goes into the process data display mode (refer to the Chapter "Process data processing"). OP2 remains in the particular initialization step until it has been completed. Depending on the particular configured software, it can take up to a minute to establish the communications link. This link can only be established after the SIMADYN D subrack has run-up. If an attempt is made to select operating modes, process data- or binary value display while the link is being established, OP2 ignores this attempt. However, received message telegrams are processed. Errors when establishing the link If errors occur when establishing a communications link, an appropriate system message is generated and the LED in the key SYSMSG starts to flash. The message can then be read-out by depressing the SYSMSG key. OP2 waits until the error has been rectified. The following errors can occur: * No activity on the USS bus (S24 system message). This message is set once when OP2 runs-up, and disappears as soon as the first telegram is transferred along the bus. - SIMADYN D subracks are not powered-up or are running-up. - BUS coupling is not available or faulted, cable not inserted. - baud rate incorrectly set. * No SCAN telegram with node number (station number) of the OP2 after the protocol monitoring time has expired (system message S25). - the incorrect BUS address is set in OP2 - SIMADYN D configuring incorrect. * Transfer error (system message S4). The message only appears until the correct telegram has been received. - line fault, incorrect baud rate. * Erroneous INIT data The received data are logically erroneous. - cable fault, incorrect baud rate. - check the configured software. The errors must be rectified. The OP2 can then be re-initialized, initiated via the system mode. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-19 10 Operator control panel OP2 10.6 Handling OP2 errors OP2 has two types of error messages: * System messages: The messages can be analyzed using the SYSMSG key. (refer to Chapter "OP2 error handling). * Operating messages: The messages are displayed for approx. 3 seconds and then automatically disappear. (refer to Chapter "Operating messages"). 10.6.1 System messages If OP2 identifies an error during parameterization, initialization or in cyclic operation, an appropriate error message is entered into the system error field and the LED in the SYSMSG key starts to flash. SYS MSG Function selection Scroll through all active messages If there is no active message: The following message is displayed No. 19 (NO SYSTEM ERROR) Running functions are canceled SYSTEM MSG VAL SYS MSG BIN Only possible after the INIT phase No function The message can be displayed using the SYSMSG key. All of the error messages and associated error causes and corrective actions are now subsequently described. The errors cannot be acknowledged. The cause must be removed, otherwise error-free operation is not possible. These are the system messages: 10-20 No Text Description /cause/ corrective action Reference (Chapter) 10 INITIALIZATION ERROR MEASURED VALUE NO. INIT telegram error for a process data. Repeat initialization. Check configuring. 2.2.1 18 NO PRINTER BUFFER FREE The printer cannot print-out a message fast enough. Messages are lost. Check the printer and printer connection. 1.4.6 19 NO SYSTEM ERROR System mode: There are no active error messages 3 23 DATA TRANSFER ERROR, CHECK HARDWARE, Data transfer errors occur on the USS bus: - faults on the cable - incorrect baud rate - BUS conflict on the USS bus 2.2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.6.2 No Text Description /cause/ corrective action - defective BUS cable Reference (Chapter) 24 SYSTEM ERROR Device not able to function. Critical faults/errors in the electronics. General information 25 INIT. ERROR, NO MEASURED VALUE INIT. DATA Process data haven't been completely initialized. OP2 expects additional process initialization data. OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS structure and configuring. 2.3 26 INIT. ERROR, NO BINARY VALUE INIT. DATA Process data haven't been completely initialized. OP2 expects additional process initialization data. OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS structure and configuring. 2.3 27 INIT. ERROR, MEASURED VALUE INIT. DATA The initialization data for the process data are erroneous. The OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS structure and configuring 2.3 28 INIT.ERROR, BINARY VALUE - INIT. DATA The initialization data for the process data are erroneous. The OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS structure and configuring. 2.3 29 MEASURED VALUE CHANGE ERROR 1.2.3 Error when changing the process data. Changing process data in the VAL/CHANGE mode was unsuccessful. Repeat the function, if required check configuring. 30 INITIALIZATION ERROR, DELAY Initialization time monitoring (watchdog) exceeded. OP2 not ready. Check the BUS structure and configuring. 2.3.2 31 INTERRUPTION TO THE HOST CONNECTION No USS telegrams are received. Check the BUS connection/cable. 2.2 32 NO BUS CONNECTION, INCORRECT STATION ADDRESS 2.2 + 1.5.4 No telegrams with their own particular station address received. Configuring error or BUS address incorrectly set. 33 PRINTER NOT READY OR NOT CONNECTED OP 2 does not print. The printer does not respond. Check the printer and printer cable. 1.4.6 35 EPROM SAVE UNSUCCESSFUL Saving the VAL/CHG/ mode in the EPROM unsuccessful, check configuring. 1.2.3 36 TELEGRAM ERROR, NO BUS CIRCULATION Check the BUS structure, check the configuring, master is not transmitting SCAN telegram with the OP node number. 2.2 10 Operating messages Information texts, alarms (warnings) and fault/error messages are displayed as operating messages for approximately three seconds, in order to support the operator resolve problems. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-21 Operator control panel OP2 No Text Description /cause/ corrective action 1 MEASURED VALUE NOT A process data number V1..V24 INITIALIZED was selected which was not Reference (Chapter) 1.2 configured in SIMADYN D 10-22 2 FUNCTION NOT PERMISSIBLE This function is not permissible in this mode. General information 3 UPPER LIMIT EXCEEDED The configured upper limits were exceeded when a setpoint was entered or changed. 1.2 4 LOWER LIMIT FALLEN BELOW The configured lower limit was fallen below when entering a setpoint or changing it 1.2 5 SETPOINT CHANGE INHIBITED When selecting the change mode for a process data, SIMADYN D did not enable the change. Presently occupied/changed by another OP or, was configured as ACT value. 1.2 6 LAST CHANGE STILL NOT ACCEPTED SIMADYN D did not accept the last 1.2 process data change. Repeat the function or check the configuring. 7 DELAY TIME EXPIRED SIMADYN D has still not accepted the actual process data change. The monitoring time (watchdog) exceeded. Repeat the function or check the configuring. 1.2 8 FUNCTION NOT POSSIBLE A key was depressed which is not possible in the current mode. General info 9 INCORRECT INPUT An invalid value has been entered General info 11 INITIALIZATION RUNNING OP2 waits for general INIT DATA. OP2 not ready, if required, check BUS structure and configuring. 2.2.1 12 MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZATION OP2 waits for process data initialization. OP2 not ready, if required check BUS structure or configuring. 2.2.1 13 BINARY VALUE INITIALIZATION OP2 waits for BINARY VALUE initialization. OP2 not ready, if required, check BUS structure or configuring. 2.2.1 14 NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED No process data were initialized 1.2 and configured, VAL function is not possible 15 NUMBER OF LOST MESSGES: 1.4 Message processing overflow message. This message is entered into the message buffer as the latest message. The most recent messages overwrite the oldest messages. The number of lost messages is incremented until messages are deleted using DEL. 17 NO FURTHER MESSAGES PRESENT The end of the messages has been 1.4 reached when scrolling through the message buffer. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 No Text Description /cause/ corrective action Reference (Chapter) 20 RAM-TEST UNSUCCESSFUL, REPLACE THE UNIT OP2 has an electronics defect and is not functioning: Self-test message 2.1.2 21 FLASH TEST UNSUCCESSFUL, REPLACE THE UNIT OP2 has an electronics defect and is not functioning: Self-test message 2.1.2 22 EPROM-INCORRECT EPROM CHECKSUM, REPLACE THE UNIT OP2 has an electronics defect and is not functioning: Self-test message 2.1.2 34 INITIALIZATION REQUESTED OP2 waits for initialization data 2.3 35 EPROM SAVE UNSUCCESSFUL VAL/CHG/ save mode unsuccessful in the EPROM Check configuring. 1.2.3 37 PRINTER INTERFACE OK Self-test message 38 DEFECTIVEW PRINTER INTERFACE Self-test message 39 CALCULATING EPROM CHECKSUM Self-test message 40 RAM READ/WRITE TEST Self-test message 41 FLASHRAM READ/WRITE TEST Self-test message 42 TEST OK Self-test message 10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-23 Operator control panel OP2 10.7 Front panel OP2 has a two-section aluminum housing, consisting of an extruded housing frame and a rear cover panel. At the front, the unit has degree of protection IP65, and at the rear, IP20. OP 2 has ventilation slots at the top and bottom. The housing frame includes: * slots to accept labeling strips (for example to label the function keys) * the front panel with membrane keypad and LEDs Housing frame SIEMENS SIMADYN OP 2 Two-line display each line 40 characters Membrane keypad 10-24 MSG BIN VAL PRN B1 V1 V2 V3 1 2 3 DEL B2 V4 V5 V6 4 5 6 ACT B3 V7 V8 V9 7 8 9 OLD B4 V10 V11 V12 0 , +/- SEL SHIFT DIM CHG E2 EPROM SYS MSG SYSTEM Enter Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting OP2 can be mounted in cabinets or control desks: * mounting cut-out: 230 x 158 mm * mounting depth: 40 mm * max. front panel thickness: 16 mm NOTE The following points must be observed when mounting the OP: * sufficient space for protruding connectors must be provided below the mounting cut-out (a minimum of 20 mm when using standard cables)! * check that the seal is correctly located! * the tabs of the labeling strips must not be clamped behind the front panel! * the ventilation air slots in the housing may not be covered when the unit is mounted! * OP2 must be protected from direct solar radiation! Mounting measures: * insert the unit in the cut-out and ensure that it doesn't fall until it has been screwed into place. * the labeling strip tabs may not be clamped-in. Threaded spindle Allen key Back panel * Mount the unit using the screw tensioners in the front panel; insert the screw tensioners in the OP housing and rotate the threaded spindles against the front panel. Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-25 10 Operator control panel OP2 10.9 Battery change The lithium battery is used to back-up the operating data in the static RAM and to supply the CMOS clock module when the power supply is off. NOTE Changing the battery: The battery may only be changed with the power supply voltage powered-up in order to prevent data loss! 1. Remove the battery cover and remove the battery from its holder. 2. Remove the battery connector from the cable 3. Insert the new battery in the reverse order Observe the EMC guidelines and the safety-related information. Ordering spare parts: Siemens AG, Geratewerk-Karlsruhe Lithium battery 3.6 V, 1800 mAh, Order No.: W79084-E-1001-B2 ! WARNING DANGER * For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration. * When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material. * There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries. * Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and European legislation and regulations. * The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder before the subrack or power supply is disposed of. 10.10 Connecting elements S IM A D Y N D P r in te r D R 2 1 0 /2 1 1 -N , D R 2 3 0 /2 3 1 - N U S S m a s te r USS- OP2 ( L o w e r s id e o f th e u n it) V .2 4 /T T Y S S 2 A /IF 2 A S S 1 /IF 1 T e r m in a l b lo c k / p o w e r s u p p ly 10-26 RS485 N o t u s e d (V .2 4 /T T Y ) S S 2 B /IF 2 B G ro u n d c o n n e c tio n Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.11 Power supply The 4-pole terminal block is used to connect the power supply voltage and the authorization input. The authorization input is not used. Connecting the individual conductors Terminal block connections 1 4 AE Not used A+ 7 mm Power supply voltage 0V +24V DC Conductor cross-section: 0.5 ...2.5mm 10.12 Baud rates OP2 can be used on the USS bus with the following baud rates: 9.6 / 19.2 / 93.75 / 187.5 kbaud. 10.13 Cables and connectors Connector assignment OP2 is always connected to interface SS2B (RS-485 / USS-BUS). 1 5 9 6 PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RS 485 Data B GND +5 V Data A Fig. 10-1 Assignment SS 2B NOTE Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 When connecting to an RS-485 bus (e. g. SS4 communications module): Data B = RS485+ Data A = RS485- 10 10-27 Operator control panel OP2 Bus connection and cable The connection is realized via a 9-pin sub-D connector with the following circuit configuration: A) Connection as a node (station) at the center of the BUS B A (3) DATA B (8) DATA A BUS cable B A 9-pin sub-D B) Connected as node at the end of the BUS (with bus termination): (6) +5 V (3) Data B (8) Data A (5) End 390 150 BUS-Kabel P N 390 9-polig Sub-D A bus terminating resistor network must be installed in connector 4 (refer to the appropriate information specified with communications module SS4) 10-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Operator control panel OP2 10.14 Using a printer with OP2 10.14.1 Configuring the printer The OP2 printer interface at the unit can be parameterized in two settings: 1. XON/XOFF protocol; formatted message texts are transferred to a printer, whereby OP2 specifies the formatting. 2. XON/XOFF protocol with ETX/ACK; formatted message texts are transferred to a printer, whereby OP2 specifies the formatting. After each message, OP2 transmits an ETX (End of Text), which is acknowledged by the printer (e. g. Mannesmann Tally printer) with ACK (acknowledge). Only then can OP2 transmit a new message. 10.14.2 Printer connection A printer is always connected at interface SS1 of the OP2. Pre-assembled cables are available for Siemens printers DR210-N / DR211N / DR230-N / DR231-N: * 6XV1 440-2B... for TTY data transfer * 6XV1 440-2C... for V.24 data transfer ...= length code, refer to Catalog ST80 These cables can also be used for PT 88/89/90 printers. If required you must assemble a different cable for other printers. NOTE Siemens AG accepts no liability for incorrect functioning and damage which are caused by using self-assembled cables or cables from thirdparties! 8 15 1 9 PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 General Screen V.24 TTY RxD- RxD TxD CTS TxD+ TxDScreen RxD+ 10 RTS +20mA GND +20mA +5V GND Fig. 10-2 Assignment SS 1 and SS 2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 10-29 Operator control panel OP2 10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips The function keys of the OP2 are labeled with B1 to B4 and V1 to V12 when they are shipped from the factory. A set of (4 x) unlabeled strips are provided with the OP2 so that customers can make their own key labels. When these labels are used, they cover the standard labels. ! CAUTION Before inserting the labeling strips, the labeling must be smear proof, as a membrane keyboard, cannot be cleaned inside. The front panel can only be replaced by a service workshop incurring considerable costs. If necessary, remove old labeling strips at the tabs. Carefully insert label strips with smear-proof labeling. OP2 (Lower unit side) SS1/IF1 SS2A/IF2A SS2B/IF2B Fig. 10-3 Lower side of the unit showing the labeling strips If the OP2 is already mounted, we recommend that the screw tensioners are released and the unit is carefully raised towards the front out of the cut-out. NOTE Do not suspend the OP 2 at its connecting cables! The following dimension drawing shows the individual labeling strips and the visible fields (which can be used for labeling): 88 3 x 16,7 = 50,1 16,7 2,5 14,2 14 (4x) Fig. 10-4 Dimension drawing, labeling strips If you make your own labeling strips using the dimension drawing above, observe that they should not be more than 0.1 mm thick! 10-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 03.2001 Index C Communications carrier module CS8 ........................................................................................... 6-8 Communications module SS4 ..................................................................................................... 6-31 SS4 at OP2 or VD1 .................................................................................................................. 6-33 Communications module SS5, SS52 .......................................................................................... 6-41 Communications subrack CS7 ...................................................................................................... 6-2 Conversion Plug-in cables............................................................................................................................. 9-3 Converter control ITDC ............................................................................................................... 5-45 Coupling memory module MM11, MM3, MM4 .............................................................................. 4-2 CPU module PM5.......................................................................................................................... 3-2 CPU module PM6........................................................................................................................ 3-11 CS12-CS22 Application information ............................................................................................................. 6-19 Cascading ................................................................................................................................ 6-18 Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-15 Slave connection ...................................................................................................................... 6-16 Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 6-19 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-20 CS7 Application information ............................................................................................................... 6-4 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-7 Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-2 Interface to the communications module ................................................................................... 6-3 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 6-6 CS8 Application information ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 6-11 Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Interface to the communications module ................................................................................... 6-8 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-11 CSH11 Application information ............................................................................................................. 6-13 Connecting to SINEC H1 ......................................................................................................... 6-12 Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 6-13 Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-12 Parameterizing interface .......................................................................................................... 6-12 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-14 E EA12 Adjustment procedure ................................................................................................................ 5-2 Analog outputs ........................................................................................................................... 5-5 Application information ............................................................................................................... 5-4 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 5-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Edition 05.2006 I-1 Index Connector assignments.............................................................................................................. 5-4 Description.................................................................................................................................. 5-2 Noise signals .............................................................................................................................. 5-2 Supplementary components....................................................................................................... 5-2 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 5-5 EB11 Application information ............................................................................................................. 5-13 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-14 Binary outputs........................................................................................................................... 5-14 Cables ........................................................................................................................................ 5-8 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-15 Connector assignments.............................................................................................................. 5-9 Description.................................................................................................................................. 5-7 Supplementary components....................................................................................................... 5-8 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-14 Terminal assignments ................................................................................................................ 5-9 EP3 with IS_x Description................................................................................................................................ 3-17 IS_1,IS_2 and IS_3 .................................................................................................................. 3-17 Expansion module IT41............................................................................................................... 5-16 Expansion module IT42............................................................................................................... 5-33 F Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 ......................................................................... 6-15 I I/O module EA12 ........................................................................................................................... 5-2 I/O module EB11 ........................................................................................................................... 5-7 Interface module SB10 ................................................................................................................ 8-11 Interface module SB60 ................................................................................................................ 8-17 Interface module SB61 ................................................................................................................ 8-22 Interface module SB70 ................................................................................................................ 8-29 Interface module SB71 ................................................................................................................ 8-35 Interface module SE13.1 ............................................................................................................... 8-4 Interface module SE26.1 ............................................................................................................... 8-7 Interface modules Overview of plug-in cables ......................................................................................................... 9-3 Interface submodule SS2 ............................................................................................................ 6-27 IT41 15 V incremental encoder ........................................................................................................ 5-29 5 V incremental encoder .......................................................................................................... 5-30 Analog inputs............................................................................................................................ 5-28 Analog outputs.......................................................................................................................... 5-28 Application information ............................................................................................................. 5-27 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-29 Binary outputs........................................................................................................................... 5-29 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-16 Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-19 Coding connector ..................................................................................................................... 5-18 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-31 Connector assignments............................................................................................................ 5-20 Description................................................................................................................................ 5-16 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-16 I-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Index Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-27 Interrupt inputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-30 Interrupt reset outputs .............................................................................................................. 5-30 Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-19 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-28 IT42 Analog inputs, integrating......................................................................................................... 5-42 Analog inputs, sampling ........................................................................................................... 5-42 Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-43 Application information ............................................................................................................. 5-41 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-43 Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-43 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-33 Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-34 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-44 Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 5-35 Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-33 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-33 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-41 Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-34 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-42 ITDC Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-53 Application information ............................................................................................................. 5-55 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-53 Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-54 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-47 Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-48 Coding plug .............................................................................................................................. 5-45 Connecting diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-55 Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 5-49 Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-45 Incremental encoders 15 V ...................................................................................................... 5-54 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-45 Mounting/installation................................................................................................................. 5-54 Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-48 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-53 ITSL Application information ............................................................................................................. 6-21 Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-21 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 6-21 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 6-21 Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 6-21 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-22 M MM11, MM3, MM4 Description ................................................................................................................................. 4-2 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 4-7 MM3 Radio clock DCF-77 ................................................................................................................... 4-4 Real-time clock........................................................................................................................... 4-3 Module CSH11 ............................................................................................................................ 6-12 MS5, MS51, MS52 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 I-3 Index Description.................................................................................................................................. 8-2 Program size .............................................................................................................................. 8-2 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-3 O OP2 Battery change ....................................................................................................................... 10-26 Cables and connectors........................................................................................................... 10-27 Connections............................................................................................................................ 10-26 Function overview .................................................................................................................... 10-2 Installation .............................................................................................................................. 10-25 Operating messages .............................................................................................................. 10-21 Printer operation ..................................................................................................................... 10-29 Process data handling.............................................................................................................. 10-3 System message .................................................................................................................... 10-20 Operator panel OP2 .................................................................................................................... 10-2 P Plug-in cables ................................................................................................................................ 9-2 Cable types................................................................................................................................. 9-4 Conversion ................................................................................................................................. 9-3 Description.................................................................................................................................. 9-2 How they can be connected to modules .................................................................................... 9-3 Overview..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 Ribbon cable SC13 .................................................................................................................... 9-5 Ribbon cable SC17.2 ................................................................................................................. 9-6 Ribbon cable SC31.2 ................................................................................................................. 9-6 Ribbon cable SC7 ...................................................................................................................... 9-4 Ribbon cables SC55................................................................................................................. 9-12 Round cable SC12 ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 Round cable SC49 ..................................................................................................................... 9-7 Round cable SC50 ..................................................................................................................... 9-8 Round cable SC51 ..................................................................................................................... 9-9 Round cable SC54 ................................................................................................................... 9-10 Round cable SC57 ................................................................................................................... 9-13 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 9-2 PM5 7-segment display ...................................................................................................................... 3-5 Absolute value encoder.............................................................................................................. 3-4 Button ......................................................................................................................................... 3-6 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 3-10 Connector assignments.............................................................................................................. 3-7 Description.................................................................................................................................. 3-2 Incremental encoder................................................................................................................... 3-4 Inputs.......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 Interface module......................................................................................................................... 3-4 Performance data ....................................................................................................................... 3-2 Program memory module........................................................................................................... 3-3 Program size .............................................................................................................................. 3-3 Programming .............................................................................................................................. 3-2 Real-time clock ........................................................................................................................... 3-6 Select connections ..................................................................................................................... 3-3 Service interface......................................................................................................................... 3-3 I-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Index Software protection .................................................................................................................... 3-6 Supplementary components ...................................................................................................... 3-7 Technical Data ........................................................................................................................... 3-8 PM6 7-segment display .................................................................................................................... 3-13 Application instructions............................................................................................................. 3-15 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 3-12 Button ....................................................................................................................................... 3-14 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 3-16 Description ............................................................................................................................... 3-11 Interface module....................................................................................................................... 3-12 Performance data..................................................................................................................... 3-11 Program memory module......................................................................................................... 3-12 Program size ............................................................................................................................ 3-11 Programming............................................................................................................................ 3-11 Real-time clock......................................................................................................................... 3-14 Service interface....................................................................................................................... 3-12 Softwareschutz......................................................................................................................... 3-14 Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 3-15 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 3-15 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52............................................................................. 8-2 R Radio clock DCF-77 Clock setting............................................................................................................................... 4-5 Receive status............................................................................................................................ 4-6 Time display ............................................................................................................................... 4-5 Ribbon cable 40 core 4 x 10 core..................................................................................................................... 9-5 Ribbon cable 10 core SC7 ............................................................................................................................... 9-4 40 core/2 x 20 core SC55 ........................................................................................................ 9-12 50 core SC17.2 .......................................................................................................................... 9-6 50 core SC31.2 .......................................................................................................................... 9-6 Ribbon cable SC13 ....................................................................................................................... 9-5 Ribbon cable SC17.2 .................................................................................................................... 9-6 Ribbon cable SC31.2 .................................................................................................................... 9-6 Ribbon cable SC55 ..................................................................................................................... 9-12 Ribbon cable SC7 ......................................................................................................................... 9-4 Round cable 15 core/26 core SC50 ................................................................................................................ 9-8 20 core, twisted pairs SC12 ....................................................................................................... 9-4 25 core/26 core SC51 ................................................................................................................ 9-9 50 core/2 x 26 core SC49 .......................................................................................................... 9-7 50 core/5 x 10 core SC54 ........................................................................................................ 9-10 9 core SC57 ............................................................................................................................. 9-13 with Adapter SC57 ................................................................................................................... 9-13 Round cable SC12 ........................................................................................................................ 9-4 Round cable SC49 ........................................................................................................................ 9-7 Round cable SC50 ........................................................................................................................ 9-8 Round cable SC51 ........................................................................................................................ 9-9 Round cable SC54 ...................................................................................................................... 9-10 Round cable SC57 ...................................................................................................................... 9-13 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 I-5 Index S S12 and SR24 Number of slots ........................................................................................................................ 2-13 SB10 Application information ............................................................................................................. 8-13 Binary signals ........................................................................................................................... 8-14 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 8-16 Connector assignments............................................................................................................ 8-15 Description................................................................................................................................ 8-11 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 8-14 SB60 Application information ............................................................................................................. 8-18 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 8-21 Connector assignment ............................................................................................................. 8-20 Description................................................................................................................................ 8-17 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 8-19 Terminal assignments .............................................................................................................. 8-17 SB61 Application information ............................................................................................................. 8-24 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 8-26 Connector assignments............................................................................................................ 8-27 Description.......................................................................................................................8-22, 8-28 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 8-26 Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................ 8-23 Test socket ............................................................................................................................... 8-23 SB70 Application information ............................................................................................................. 8-31 Binary outputs........................................................................................................................... 8-32 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 8-34 Connector assignments............................................................................................................ 8-33 Description................................................................................................................................ 8-29 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 8-32 SB71 Application information ............................................................................................................. 8-37 Binary outputs........................................................................................................................... 8-38 Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 8-40 Connector assignments............................................................................................................ 8-39 Description................................................................................................................................ 8-35 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 8-38 Test socket ............................................................................................................................... 8-36 SC12.............................................................................................................................................. 9-4 SC13.............................................................................................................................................. 9-5 SC17.2........................................................................................................................................... 9-6 SC31.2........................................................................................................................................... 9-6 SC49.............................................................................................................................................. 9-7 SC50.............................................................................................................................................. 9-8 SC51.............................................................................................................................................. 9-9 SC54............................................................................................................................................ 9-10 SC55............................................................................................................................................ 9-12 SC57............................................................................................................................................ 9-13 Adapter for CS7/SS4................................................................................................................ 9-13 SC7................................................................................................................................................ 9-4 I-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Index SE13.1 Application information ............................................................................................................... 8-5 Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-4 T element ................................................................................................................................... 8-4 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-5 Voltage divider............................................................................................................................ 8-5 SE26.1 Application information ............................................................................................................... 8-8 Connecting example................................................................................................................... 8-8 Connector assignment ............................................................................................................... 8-9 Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-7 Diagrams .................................................................................................................................. 8-10 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-9 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x ..................................................................................... 3-17 SIMOLINK interface ITSL............................................................................................................ 6-21 SR12 and SR24 Installation Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 2-19 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 2-21 SR12 and SR24 Backplane buses ...................................................................................................................... 2-17 Backplane connector................................................................................................................ 2-18 Battery back-up ........................................................................................................................ 2-16 Connection assignment............................................................................................................ 2-14 Daisy chain-jumpers................................................................................................................. 2-17 Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-13 Input voltage............................................................................................................................. 2-15 Output voltage .......................................................................................................................... 2-15 Power supply............................................................................................................................ 2-13 Ventilation/cooling .................................................................................................................... 2-19 SR12 and SR24 subracks ........................................................................................................... 2-13 SR12 und SR24 Technische Daten .................................................................................................................... 2-21 SR6 and SR6V Backplane bus............................................................................................................................ 2-5 Battery back-up .......................................................................................................................... 2-4 Connection elements.................................................................................................................. 2-2 Daisy chain jumper..................................................................................................................... 2-5 Description ................................................................................................................................. 2-2 Dimension drawings ................................................................................................................. 2-11 Installation Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 2-7 Power supply.............................................................................................................................. 2-2 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 2-8 Ventilation/cooling ...................................................................................................................... 2-6 SR6 and SR6V subracks............................................................................................................... 2-2 SRT400 Battery back-up ........................................................................................................................ 2-28 Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-26 Input voltage............................................................................................................................. 2-27 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity ................................................................................. 2-28 Output voltage .......................................................................................................................... 2-27 Power supply............................................................................................................................ 2-26 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 2-29 Ventilation/cooling .................................................................................................................... 2-28 SRT400 Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 I-7 Index Dimension drawing................................................................................................................... 2-31 SS1 Description................................................................................................................................ 6-23 Pin assignment ......................................................................................................................... 6-26 Recommended connection....................................................................................................... 6-23 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-26 SS1 interface submodule ............................................................................................................ 6-23 SS2 Description................................................................................................................................ 6-27 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-28 SS31 Description................................................................................................................................ 6-29 Enabling the transmitter ........................................................................................................... 6-29 Pin assignment ......................................................................................................................... 6-29 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-30 SS31 interface submodule .......................................................................................................... 6-29 SS4 Carrier module CS7.................................................................................................................. 6-31 Configuration Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 6-36 Connector assignment ............................................................................................................. 6-39 Description................................................................................................................................ 6-31 Diagnostic functions ................................................................................................................. 6-37 Diagnostics interface X5........................................................................................................... 6-38 Interface.................................................................................................................................... 6-31 PC............................................................................................................................................. 6-31 Programmer.............................................................................................................................. 6-31 Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 6-36 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-40 USS connection for PO2, VD1PC ............................................................................................ 6-33 SS5 Parameterizing ......................................................................................................................... 6-42 SS5, SS52 Configuration Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 6-43 Connector assignments............................................................................................................ 6-44 Description................................................................................................................................ 6-41 Diagnostics LED ....................................................................................................................... 6-43 Profibus .................................................................................................................................... 6-41 Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 6-42 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-45 SS52 Drive program........................................................................................................................... 6-42 Parameterizing ......................................................................................................................... 6-42 SS53load .................................................................................................................................. 6-42 SU10, SU11, SU12 and SU13 Application information ............................................................................................................. 8-44 Function description ................................................................................................................. 8-42 General..................................................................................................................................... 8-41 Pin assignment ......................................................................................................................... 8-44 Process signals ........................................................................................................................ 8-42 Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 8-43 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 8-46 Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................ 8-44 Subrack SRT400 ......................................................................................................................... 2-26 I-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 Index T T400 Absolute value encoders............................................................................................................ 7-7 Analog inputs............................................................................................................................ 7-13 Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 7-13 Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 7-13 Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 7-14 Coarse/fine pulse evaluation...................................................................................................... 7-4 Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-2 Incremental encoder................................................................................................................... 7-4 Incremental encoder 15 V ........................................................................................................ 7-14 Inputs/outputs............................................................................................................................. 7-3 Mechanical design...................................................................................................................... 7-4 Parameters............................................................................................................................... 7-10 Serial interfaces.......................................................................................................................... 7-7 Software protection .................................................................................................................... 7-4 Synchronizing............................................................................................................................. 7-9 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 7-12 Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................ 7-10 Terminals.................................................................................................................................... 7-4 Technical data SIMADYN D Ambient conditions ................................................................................................................... 1-18 Application and operation........................................................................................................... 1-4 Cabinet ....................................................................................................................................... 1-9 Cables ...............................................................................................................................1-6, 1-14 Connecting external voltages..................................................................................................... 1-6 Design- und EMC Guidelines..................................................................................................... 1-2 ESD .......................................................................................................................................... 1-15 Installation .................................................................................................................................. 1-6 Installation clearances.............................................................................................................. 1-10 Installation in equipement ........................................................................................................ 1-14 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Potential bonding........................................................................................................................ 1-6 Power loss in the cabinet ......................................................................................................... 1-11 Power supply............................................................................................................................ 1-12 Protective grounding .................................................................................................................. 1-9 Radios ........................................................................................................................................ 1-9 Shipping modules..................................................................................................................... 1-17 Subracks .................................................................................................................................. 1-13 Technology module T400.............................................................................................................. 7-2 Technology subrack SRT400 ........................................................................................................ 7-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006 I-9 Index I-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D Ausgabe 05.2006